You are on page 1of 610

OWNER'S MANUAL

VÄLKOMMEN!

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas- you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
sengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
requirements.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION SAFETY
This is how you find owner's information 14 Writing characters/words by hand on 53 Safety 56
the screen
Digital owner's manual in the car 15 Safety during pregnancy 56
Navigating in the digital owner's manual 16 Whiplash Protection System 57
Owner's Manual in mobile devices 18 Seatbelt 58
Volvo Cars support site 19 Seatbelt tensioner 59
Reading the owner's manual 19 Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt 60
Recording data 22 Door and seatbelt reminder 61
Important information on accesso- 23 Airbags 63
ries, extra equipment and diagnostic
socket Driver and passenger airbags 63
Volvo ID 23 Activating/deactivating the passen- 65
ger airbag*
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure 25
Side airbag 68
IntelliSafe-driver support 28
Inflatable curtain 68
Sensus - online connectivity and 29
entertainment Safety mode 69
The owner's manual and the environment 32 Starting/moving the car after safety 70
mode
Windows, glass and mirrors 32
Child safety 71
Overview of the centre display 33
Child seats 71
Operating the centre display 36
Upper mounting points for child seats 74
Navigating in the centre display's views 40
Lower mounting points for child seats 74
Symbols in the centre display's status bar 45
Table for location of child seats 76
Change settings for the centre display 46 using the car's seatbelts
Function view with buttons for car 47 i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 78
functions
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats 79
Using the keyboard in the centre display 49
Table for location of i-Size child seats 82

2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand 84 Voice recognition control of radio 116 Active bending lights* 138
drive car and media
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* 138
Instruments and controls, right-hand 85 Voice recognition control of climate 117
drive car control Rear fog lamp 139
Driver display 88 Voice recognition and map navigation 118 Brake lights 140
Driver display settings 92 Manual front seat 119 Hazard warning flashers 140
Indicator symbols in the driver display 93 Power front seat* 120 Using direction indicators 141
Warning symbols in the driver display 95 Adjusting the power front seat* 120 Passenger compartment lighting 141
Outside temperature gauge 96 Using the memory function in the 121 Home safe light duration 144
Clock power front seat* Approach light duration 144
97
Fuel gauge Multi-functional front seat* 122 Using windscreen wipers 145
97
License agreement for the driver display Adjusting functions in the multi-func- 122 Activating/deactivating the rain sensor 145
98 tional front seat*
Application menu in the driver display 103 Windscreen and headlamp washers 146
Adjusting the passenger seat from 124
Using the application menu in the 104 the driver's seat* Rear window wiper and washer 147
driver display Power windows 148
Adjusting the head restraints in the 125
Messages in the driver display and 105 rear seat Operating power windows 148
the centre display
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat 126 Adjusting the door mirrors 149
Managing messages in the driver 107
display and the centre display Steering wheel 129 Interior rearview mirror 151
Managing messages saved from the 108 Adjusting the steering wheel 130 Compass* 152
driver display and centre display Lighting control 131 Calibrating the compass* 153
Head-up display* 110 Headlamp levelling 132 Panorama roof* 154
Voice recognition 113 Position lamps 133 Operating the panorama roof* 155
Using voice recognition 114 Daytime running lights 134 HomeLink®* 158
Settings for voice recognition 115 Dipped beam 134
Programming HomeLink®* 159
Voice recognition control of the phone 116 Activating/deactivating main beam 135
Trip computer 161

3
CLIMATE CONTROL
Show trip data in the driver display 163 Climate control 176 Activating/deactivating heating of 199
steering wheel*
Show trip statistics in the centre display 164 Climate control - sensors 177
Parking climate* 200
Settings in the centre display 165 Perceived temperature 177
Categories in the settings menu Air quality Starting/stopping preconditioning* 201
166 178
Changing system settings in the set- Passenger compartment filter Timer for preconditioning* 202
168 179
tings menu Setting the timer for preconditioning* 202
Clean Zone Interior Package* 179
Resetting settings in the settings menu 169 Activating/deactivating the timer for 204
Interior Air Quality System* 179
Driver profiles 169 preconditioning*
Climate controls 180
Selecting driver profile 170 Starting/switching off climate com- 204
Climate controls in the centre display 181 fort retention*
Editing a driver profile 171
Climate controls at the rear of the 182 Symbols and messages for parking 206
Linking remote control key to driver 172 tunnel console* climate control*
profile
Auto-regulating the climate 183 Heater* 207
Changing settings for apps 173
Activating/deactivating air conditioning 184 Parking heater* 208
Resetting user data for change of 173
ownership Regulating the temperature 185 Additional heater* 209
Regulating the fan level 187
Activating/deactivating defrost of 188
windows and door mirrors
Activating/deactivating air recirculation 191
Air distribution 191
Changing the air distribution 192
Opening/closing and aiming the air vents 193
Table of air distribution options 195
Activating/deactivating heating of 197
the seats*
Activating/deactivating ventilation of 198
the seats*

4
LOADING AND STORAGE LOCKS AND ALARM
Passenger compartment interior 212 Remote control key 230 Type approval for the remote control 260
key system
Tunnel console 212 Remote control key range 232
Electrical sockets 214 Red Key - Restricted remote control key* 233
Using the glovebox 218 Antenna locations for the start and 234
lock system
Sun visors 219
Locking/unlocking from the outside 235
Cargo area 219
Indication on locking/unlocking the car 237
Recommendations for loading 219
Locking/unlocking from the inside 239
Load retaining eyelets 221
Deadlocks* 241
Bag hooks 221
Locking/unlocking the tailgate 242
Through-load hatch in the rear seat 222
Using private locking 244
Cargo cover* 222
Detachable key blade 245
Safety net* 224
Locking/unlocking with the detacha- 246
Safety grille* 226 ble key blade
Power operated tailgate* 247
Opening/closing the tailgate with 250
foot movement*
Replacing the battery in the remote 252
control key
Immobiliser 255
Child safety locks 256
Alarm* 257
Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm* 259
Disarming the alarm* without work- 259
ing remote control key
Detection of unknown car component* 259

5
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed-dependent steering force 270 Limitations of Distance Warning* 289 Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* 320
Stability system 270 Adaptive cruise control* 290 Radar unit 322
Electronic Stability Control ESC 271 Activating and starting the Adaptive 294 Limitations of the radar unit 324
Sport mode for electronic stability control cruise control*
272 Type approval for radar units 328
Symbols and messages for elec- Managing the speed of the Adaptive 295
273 Camera unit 332
tronic stability control cruise control*
Limitations of the camera unit 333
Speed limiter* Setting the time interval for the 296
275 adaptive cruise control* City Safety 336
Activating and starting the Speed limiter 276 Deactivating/activating the Adaptive 298 Setting the warning distance for City 339
Managing speed for the Speed limiter 276 cruise control* Safety
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed 277 Overtaking assistance with adaptive 300 Detection of obstacles with City Safety 340
Limiter cruise control* or Pilot Assist*
City Safety in cross traffic 342
Switching off the speed limiter 278 Change of target and automatic 301
braking with the Adaptive Cruise Control City Safety with evasive manoeuvres 343
Automatic speed limiter* 279
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* 302 City Safety when evasive manoeu- 345
Activating/deactivating the automatic 280 vres are prevented
speed limiter Change between Cruise control and 303
adaptive cruise control* Limitations of City Safety 346
Changing the tolerance for the Auto- 281
matic speed limiter Symbols and messages for the Messages for City Safety 348
305
Adaptive cruise control* Rear Collision Warning 349
Cruise control 282
Activating and starting the Cruise control Pilot Assist* 307 BLIS* 349
283
Managing speed for the Cruise control Activating and starting the Pilot Assist* 311 Activate/deactivate BLIS* 351
284
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise 285 Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* 313 Limitations of BLIS* 351
control Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist* 314 Cross Traffic Alert* 352
Deactivating Cruise Control 286 Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist* 315 Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* 353
Distance Warning* 287 Change of target and automatic 317 Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert 354
Activating and setting the time inter- 288 braking with Pilot Assist*
Messages for BLIS* and Cross 356
val for Distance warning* Limitations of Pilot Assist* 319 Traffic Alert*

6
STARTING AND DRIVING
Road Sign Information* 357 Symbols and messages for Park 383 Alcohol lock* 402
Assist Pilot*
Sign display with Road Sign Information 358 Bypass of the alcohol lock* 402
Park assist camera* 384
Road Sign Information with Speed 360 Before starting the engine with the 402
Warning and Settings Park assist lines and fields for the 386 alcohol lock
park assist camera*
Road Sign Information with Speed 361 Ignition positions 403
Camera Information* Starting the Park assist camera* 388 Starting the car 404
Limitations of Road Sign Information* 362 Limitations for park assist camera* 389 Switching off the car 405
Driver Alert Control 363 Symbols and messages for Park 391 Steering lock 406
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control assist camera*
364 Using jump starting with another battery
Park Assist Pilot* 406
Limitations of Driver Alert Control 365 393
Gearbox 407
Lane Keeping Aid Parking with Park Assist Pilot* 394
365 Gear positions for automatic gearbox 408
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid 368 Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 397
Manual gearbox 410
Symbols and messages for lane 369 Messages for Park Assist Pilot* 400
assistance Gear shift indicator* 410
Assistance upon risk of collision 371 Gear selector inhibitor 412
Symbols and messages for assis- 372 Changing gear with steering wheel 413
tance upon risk of collision paddles*
Steering assistance upon risk of lane 373 Start/Stop 414
departure Using the Start/Stop function 414
Steering assistance upon risk of 375 Conditions for the Start/Stop function 416
head-on collision
Drive modes* 418
Steering assistance upon risk of 376
rear-end collision* Drive mode ECO 421
Park Assist* 378 Level control* and shock absorption 423
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot* 380 All-wheel drive* 425
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 381 Brake functions 425
Foot brake 425

7
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Emergency brake lights 427 Towing bracket* 444 Audio and media 456
Brake assistance 427 Extendable/retractable towing brackets* 445 Apps 456
Auto braking after a collision 428 Towing bracket specifications* 447 Audio settings 457
Parking brake 428 Driving with a trailer 448 Radio 458
Using the parking brake 429 Trailer lamps 449 Changing and searching radio stations 458
In the event of a fault in the parking 431 Trailer Stability Assist* 450 RDS radio 460
brake
Towing eye 452 Digital radio 461
Hill start assist 431
Towing 453 Linking between different radio 461
Automatic braking when stationary 432 bands FM and DAB
Recovering the car 454
Low speed control* 433 Settings for radio 462
Hill descent control* 434 Media player 463
Driving in water 435 Media playback 463
Overheating in the engine and drive 436 Gracenote® 466
system
Searching media 466
Overloading the starter battery 437
CD player* 467
Preparations for a long trip 437
Media via Bluetooth® 467
Winter driving 438
Connecting a device via Bluetooth® 468
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap 439
and refuelling Media via USB port 468
Handling of fuel 440 Connecting a device via USB port 468
Petrol 441 video 469
Diesel 441 Audio settings for media 469
Empty tank and diesel engine 442 TV* 470
Diesel particulate filter 443 Using the TV* 470
Economical driving 443 Apple CarPlay* 471

8
WHEELS AND TYRES
Using Apple CarPlay* 472 Terms and conditions for services 501 Tyres 504
and Customer Privacy Policy
Settings for Apple CarPlay* 473 Tyres' rotation direction 505
Android Auto* 473 Tread wear indicators on the tyres 506
Settings for Android Auto* 475 Checking the tyre pressures 506
Technical specifications for media 475 Tyre monitoring* 507
Phone 477 Checking tyre pressure with the tyre 509
monitoring system*
Connect phone 478
Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre 510
Connecting/disconnecting the phone 479 monitoring*
Managing phone calls 480 Calibrating tyre monitoring* 511
Managing text messages 481 Emergency puncture repair kit 512
Managing the phone book 482 Using the emergency puncture repair kit 513
Settings for phone 483 Inflate tyres with the compressor 516
Settings for text messages 483 from the emergency puncture repair kit
Bluetooth® settings 483 When changing wheels 517
Online car* 484 Removing a wheel 518
Connecting the car 484 Fitting the wheels 519
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot 486 Wheel bolts 520
No or poor connection 487 Spare wheel* 520
Remove Wi-Fi network 488 Winter wheels 521
Wi-Fi technologies and security 488 Tool kit 522
Settings for car modem* 488 Warning triangle 523
Downloading, updating and uninstal- 489 Jack* 523
ling apps First aid kit 524
License agreement for audio and media 491 Dimension designation for wheel rim 524

9
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Dimension designation for tyre 525 Volvo service programme 528 Support battery 553
Car status 528 Fuses 554
Book service and repair 528 Replacing a fuse 555
Remote updates 531 Fuses in engine compartment 556
System updates 531 Fuses under glovebox 559
Raise the car 533 Fuses in cargo area 563
Opening and closing the bonnet 535 Cleaning the exterior 567
Engine compartment overview 536 Polishing and waxing 569
Engine oil 537 Rustproofing 570
Checking and filling with engine oil 539 Cleaning the interior 570
Topping up coolant 540 Cleaning the centre display 572
Servicing the climate control system 542 Paint damage 573
Bulb replacement 542 Repairing paint damage 573
Replacing the dipped beam bulb 544
Replacing the main beam lamp 545
Replacing daytime running light 545
bulb/position lamp bulb, front
Replacing the front direction indica- 546
tor bulb
Bulb specifications 546
Wiper blades in service position 547
Replacing a wiper blade 548
Filling washer fluid 549
Starter battery 550
Symbols on the batteries 552

10
SPECIFICATIONS ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Type designations 576 Alphabetical Index 593
Dimensions 579
Weights 581
Towing capacity and towball load 582
Engine specifications 584
Engine oil — specifications 585
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil 586
Coolant — specifications 587
Transmission fluid — specifications 587
Brake fluid — specifications 587
Fuel tank - volume 588
Air conditioning — specifications 588
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 590
Approved tyre pressures 591
Performance 592

11
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION

This is how you find owner's The car's centre display1 Printed information
information In the centre display, drag down There is a supplement to the
Owner's information is available in several differ- the top view and tap on owner's manual1 in the glove-
ent product formats, both digital and printed. Owner's manual. Available box that contains information
The owner's manual is available in the car's cen- here are options for visual navi- on fuses and specifications, as
tre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo gation with exterior and interior well as a summary of important
Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a images of the car. The informa- and practical information.
supplement to the owner's manual available in tion is searchable and is also There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
the glovebox, with specifications and fuse infor- divided into categories. format that helps you to get started with the most
mation, amongst other things. A printed owner's commonly used functions in the car.
manual can be ordered. Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play, Depending on equipment level selected, market,
search for "Volvo Manual", etc. additional owner's information may also be
download the app to your available in printed format in the car.
smartphone or tablet and select
A printed owner's manual and associated supple-
the car. Available in the app are
ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to
video tutorials and options for
order.
visual navigation with exterior
and interior images of the car. It is easy to navi- Changing the language in the car's
gate between the different sections in the centre display
owner's manual and the content is searchable. Changing the language in the centre display may
Volvo Cars support site mean that some owner's information does not
Go to support.volvocars.com correspond to national or local laws and regula-
and select your country. Here tions. Don't change to a language that's difficult
you can find owner's manuals, to understand, it may then be difficult to find your
both online and in PDF format. way back in the structure on the screen.
On the Volvo Cars support site
there are also video tutorials
and further information and
help regarding your Volvo and your car owner-
ship. The page is available for most markets.

1A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.

14
INTRODUCTION

IMPORTANT Digital owner's manual in the car the owner's manual. One way is from the top
A digital2 version of the owner's manual is availa- menu, with a tap on .
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
ble in the car's centre display.
cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica-
ble laws and regulations are followed. It is Symbols and their meaning in the owner's
also important that the car is maintained and manual menu
handled in accordance with Volvo's recom- Leads to the start page of
mendations in the owner's information. the Owner's Manual.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the centre display and the prin-
ted information then it is always the printed
information that applies.
Articles grouped by cate-
Related information gory. The same article may
• Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15) appear in several catego-
• Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18) The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top
ries.
• Volvo Cars support site (p. 19) view.

• Reading the owner's manual (p. 19) To open the digital owner's manual - drag down
the top view in the centre display and tap on Leads to a Quick Guide
Owner's manual. page with links for a selec-
tion of articles that can be
NOTE particularly useful to read.
Provides answers to com-
The digital owner's manual is not available
mon questions about the
while driving.
car.

There is a range of different options for finding


information in the digital owner's manual. The
options can be reached from the start page of

2 Applies for most markets. }}

15
INTRODUCTION

|| Symbols and their meaning in the owner's Symbols and their meaning in the owner's Navigating in the digital owner's
manual menu manual menu manual
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
Exterior and interior over- Leads to short video tutori- from the centre display in the car. The content is
view images of the car. Dif- als for different functions in searchable and it is easy to navigate between
ferent parts are designated the car. different sections.
with hotspots that lead to
articles about those parts
of the car.

Indicates what version of


the Owner's Manual is
available in the car and pro-
vides other useful informa-
tion.

All articles that have been


favourited are compiled Related information
here. • Navigating in the digital owner's manual
(p. 16) The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top
view.

Open the digital owner's manual


– To open the digital owner's manual - drag
down the top view in the centre display and
tap on Owner's manual.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the digital owner's manual. To
access the owner's manual menu – press in
the upper bar of the owner's manual.

16
INTRODUCTION

Searching using categories 1. Press and then select Exterior/ Favourites


The articles in the owner's Interior. Located here are the articles
manual are structured into > Exterior/interior images are shown with that have been saved as
main categories and subcate- so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot favourites. Tap on an article in
gories. The same article can be leads to articles about the corresponding order to read it in its entirety.
found in several appropriate part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the
categories in order to be found screen to browse among the images.
more easily.
2. Tap on a hotspot. Saving/deleting articles as favourites
1. Press and then select Categories. Save an article as favourite by pressing at the
> The title of the article about the area is
> The main categories are shown in a list. shown. top right when an article is open. When an article
has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in:
2. Tap on a main category ( ). 3. Tap on the title to open the article. To go
back, press the back arrow. .
> A list of subcategories ( ) and articles
To remove an article as a favourite, press the star
( ) is shown. Learn about the car's most common again in the current article.
3. Tap on an article to open it. To go back, functions with the Quick Guide
press the back arrow. Leads to a page with links for a Video
selection of articles that can be Leads to short video tutorials
Hotspots for exterior and interior particularly useful to read in for different functions in the
Exterior and interior overview order to get to know the most car.
images of the car. Different common functions of the car.
parts are designated with hot- The articles can also be
spots that lead to articles about accessed via categories, but
those parts of the car. are collected here for quick access. Tap on an
article in order to read it in its entirety. Information
Tap on the symbol to obtain
information about which version
of the owner's manual is availa-
ble in the car as well as other
useful information.

}}

17
INTRODUCTION

|| Start page Owner's Manual in mobile devices in the owner's manual and the content is search-
Tap on the symbol to go back The owner's manual is available as a mobile able.
to the start page in the owner's app3 from both the App Store and Google Play.
manual. The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.

Using the search function


1. Tap on in the top menu of the owner's
manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part
of the screen.
2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".
> Suggestions for articles and categories
are shown while letters are being entered.
3. Tap on the article/category to access it.
The owner's manual can be
Related information
downloaded as a mobile app
• Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
from the App Store or Google
• Using the keyboard in the centre display Play. The QR code provided
(p. 49) here takes you directly to the The mobile app is available from both the App Store and
Google Play.
app. Alternatively, you can
search for "Volvo manual" in Related information
the App Store or Google Play. • Reading the owner's manual (p. 19)
The app contains a video along with exterior and • Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)
interior images where different parts of the car
are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which
lead to articles about the area in question. It is
easy to navigate between the different sections

3 For certain mobile devices.

18
INTRODUCTION

Volvo Cars support site ments and warranties. Here there is also informa- Reading the owner's manual
More information on your car is available on the tion about accessories and software adapted for A good way of getting to know your new car is
Volvo Cars website and support site. your car model. to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey.
Support on the Internet Related information
• Volvo ID (p. 23) Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The
become familiar with new functions, get advice
support site is available for most markets.
on how best to handle the car in different situa-
It contains support for functions such as web- tions and learn how to make the best use of all
based services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the the car's features. Please pay attention to the
navigation system* and apps. Videos and step- safety instructions contained in the owner's man-
by-step instructions explain different procedures, ual.
e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a Development work is constantly underway in
mobile phone. order to improve our product. Modifications may
Downloadable information mean that information, descriptions and illustra-
tions in the owner's manual differ from the equip-
Maps ment in the car. We reserve the right to make
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation, there modifications without prior notice.
is the facility to download maps from the support
page. Do not remove this manual from the car - if prob-
lems should arise then the necessary information
Owner's manuals as PDF about where and how to seek professional help
Owner's manuals are available for download in will be missing.
PDF format. Select car model and model year to
download the manual as required. © Volvo Car Corporation

Contact Options/accessories
The support site contains contact details to cus- In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
tomer support and your nearest Volvo dealer. manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
Log in to Volvo Cars website extra equipment).
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
All types of option/accessory are marked with an
www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is
asterisk: *.
possible to get an overview of service, agree-
}}

* Option/accessory. 19
INTRODUCTION

|| The equipment described in the owner's manual Message texts Risk of property damage
is not available in all cars - they have different There are displays in the car that show menu and
equipment depending on adaptations for the message texts. In the owner's manual the
needs of different markets and national or local appearance of these texts differs from the normal
laws and regulations. text. Examples of menu texts and message texts:
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard Phone, New message.
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Decals
Special texts The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
WARNING have the following descending degree of impor-
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of tance for the warning/information.
injury.
Warning of personal injury
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
IMPORTANT
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
damage. property.

NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of e.g. features and functions.

Footnote
The owner's manual contains information in cer-
tain locations in the form of a footnote at the bot- Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
tom of the page or at the end of a table. This text/image on black message field. Used to indi-
information is an addition to the text that it refers cate the presence of danger which, if the warning
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
table then letters are used instead of numbers fatality.
for referral.

20
INTRODUCTION

Information bered in the same way as the corresponding Images


illustration. Illustrations used in the owner's manual are
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series sometimes schematic and are intended to pro-
of illustrations where the order of the instruc- vide an overall picture or example of a certain
tions is not significant. function. Illustrations may deviate from the car's
appearance depending on equipment level and
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered
market.
and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a To be continued
movement when the relative order is of no }} This symbol is located furthest down to the
relevance. right when an article continues on the following
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- page.
step instructions then the different steps are
Continued from previous page
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the left
numbered with normal numbers.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field. Position lists when an article continues from the previous
Red circles containing a number are used in page.
NOTE overview images where different components
are pointed out. The number recurs in the
Related information
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in • Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
the owner's manual should be exact replicas position list featured in connection with the
of those in the car. They are included to show illustration that describes the item. • Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18)
their approximate appearance and location in
Bulleted lists
• Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)
the car. The information that applies to your
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
particular car is available on the respective
points in the owner's manual.
decals for your car.
Example:
Procedure lists • Coolant
Procedures where action must be taken in a cer- • Engine oil
tain sequence are numbered in the owner's man-
ual: Related information
Related information refers to other articles con-
When there is a series of illustrations for
taining closely associated information.
step-by-step instructions each step is num-

21
INTRODUCTION

Recording data driving conditions. Similarly, the system never Volvo will not contribute to the above-described
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo- information being disclosed to third parties with-
certain information about the vehicle's operation, graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit- out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with
functionality and incidents are recorded in the uation. However, other parties, such as the police, national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be
car. could use the recorded data in combination with forced to disclose information of this nature to
the type of personally identifiable information the police or other authorities who may assert a
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special legal right to access such. Special technical
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis- equipment and access to either the vehicle or the equipment which Volvo and workshops that have
ter and record data related to traffic accidents or EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis- entered into agreements with Volvo have access
collision-like situations, such as times when the tered data. to is required to be able to read and interpret the
airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor-
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
in the road. The data is recorded in order to mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv-
number of computers designed to continually
increase understanding of how vehicle systems icing and maintenance, is securely stored and
check and monitor the function of the car. They
work in these types of situations. The EDR is managed and that its management complies with
can record data during normal driving conditions,
designed to record data related to vehicle relevant legal requirements. For further informa-
but in particular register faults affecting the vehi-
dynamics and safety systems for a short time, tion - contact a Volvo dealer.
cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa-
usually 30 seconds or less.
tion of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record City Safety and the auto brake function).
data related to the following in the event of traffic
Some of the recorded data is required to enable
accidents or collision-like situations:
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
• How the various systems in the car worked and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi-
• Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts cle. The registered information is also needed to
were fastened/tensioned enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
in laws and by government authorities. Informa-
• The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com-
pedal
puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
• The travel speed of the vehicle
In addition to the above, the registered informa-
This information can help us better understand tion can be used in aggregate form for research
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju- and product development with the aim of contin-
ries and damage occur. The EDR only records uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. cars.
The EDR does not record any data during normal

22
INTRODUCTION

Important information on Volvo ID


accessories, extra equipment and Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of per-
diagnostic socket sonalized Volvo services4 online.
Incorrect connection and installation of accesso-
ries, extra equipment or software/diagnostic It is possible to create a Volvo ID from the car,
tools may have a negative effect on the car's volvocars.com or Volvo On Call app5. Certain
electronic system. functions and services require that the car is reg-
istered to a personal Volvo ID. Registering the
Certain accessories only function when associ- Volvo ID to the car makes a wide range of Volvo
ated software is installed in the car's computer services available directly from the car.
system. Volvo therefore recommends always
Examples of services:
making contact with an authorised Volvo work-
shop before the installation of accessories or Data link connector OBDII is under the instrument panel • Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when log-
extra equipment that are connected to or affect on the driver's side ging in to the Volvo On Call app.
the electrical system.
• Send to Car - Makes it possible to send an
address from an Internet map service directly
Connection of equipment to the car's
to the car.
diagnostic socket
• Book Service and Repair - Register your pre-
ferred workshop/dealer at volvocars.com to
WARNING
be able to book service directly from the car.
Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the conse-
quences if unauthorised equipment is con- Creating a Volvo ID
nected to the On-board Diagnostic socket It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different
(OBDII). This socket should only be used by ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com
trained and qualified Volvo service techni- or with Volvo On Call app, the Volvo ID must also
cians.
be registered to the car to enable use of the vari-
ous Volvo ID services.

4 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
5 If you have Volvo On Call*. }}

* Option/accessory. 23
INTRODUCTION

|| With the Volvo ID app 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically Advantages of Volvo ID
1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download sent to the specified email address. • One user name and one password to access
Centre in the centre display's app view. > A Volvo ID has now been created. Read online services, i.e. only one username and
below to learn how to register the ID to one password to remember.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
address. the car. • If the username/password for a service (e.g.
Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically Registering your Volvo ID to the car changed automatically for other services.
sent to the specified email address. If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
> A Volvo ID has now been created and Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as fol- Related information
automatically registered to the car. lows: • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
Volvo ID services can now be used. 1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID (p. 489)
On Volvo Cars website app from Download Centre in the app view. • Connecting the car (p. 484)
1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in6 using
the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo NOTE
ID. To download apps, the car must be con-
2. Enter a personal email address. nected to the Internet.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address. 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read email address.
below to learn how to register the ID to 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
the car. sent to the email address linked to your
With Volvo On Call mobile app7 Volvo ID.
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On > Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car.
Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App Volvo ID services can now be used.
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's
start page and enter a personal email
address.

6 Available in certain markets.


7 If you have Volvo On Call*.

24 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION

Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure products and solutions in order to reduce the
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on negative impact on the environment.
the development of safer and more efficient

Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core val- inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air Fuel consumption
ues and influences all operations. The environ- outside thanks to the climate control system. Since a large part of a car's total environmental
mental work is based on the whole life cycle of impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
the car and takes into account the environmental Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con-
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur-
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy- sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con-
supports a systematic approach to the opera-
product developed must have less impact on the sumption in each of their respective classes.
tion's environmental issues, which leads to con-
environment than the product it replaces. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
tinuous improvement with reduced environmental
Volvo's environmental management work has impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
resulted in the development of more effective that environmental laws and regulations in force
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
environment is also important to Volvo - the air partners must also meet these requirements.

}}

25
INTRODUCTION

|| Contributing to a better environment type of waste should be discarded - an author- Interior


An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only ised Volvo workshop is recommended. The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
contributes to a reduced impact on the environ- carefully selected and has been tested in order to
ment, but also means reduced costs for the Efficient emission control be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer-
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save "Clean inside and out" – a concept that encom- ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
money and contribute to a better environment - passes a clean interior environment as well as monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
here is some advice: highly efficient emission control. In many cases substances that cause discomfort in the event of
the exhaust emissions are well below the applica- e.g. high heat and bright light.
• Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds ble standards.
above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph) Volvo workshops and the environment
and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to Clean air in the passenger Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
increased energy consumption. compartment long service life and low fuel consumption for
• Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's A passenger compartment filter prevents dust your car. In this way you also contribute to a
recommended intervals for service and main- and pollen from entering the passenger compart- cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
tenance of the car. ment via the air intake. are entrusted with the service and maintenance
• Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
engine when stationary for longer periods. that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
Pay attention to local regulations. traffic outside. which workshop premises shall be designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
• Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops The system cleans the air in the passenger com- environment. The workshop staff have the knowl-
and uneven speed contribute to increased partment from contaminants such as particles, edge and the tools required to guarantee good
fuel consumption. hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level environmental care.
• Use preconditioning* before starting in cold ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the
conditions - it improves starting capacity and air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Recycling
reduces wear in cold weather. The engine Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
reaches normal operating temperature more queues and tunnels for example. is also important that the car is recycled in an
quickly, which decreases consumption and IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack- environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
reduces emissions. age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked therefore requested to contact a dealer for refer-
Also remember to always dispose of environmen-
with the remote control key. ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work-
shop in the event of uncertainty about how this

26 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION

Related information
• Drive modes* (p. 418)
• The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 32)
• Economical driving (p. 443)
• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 590)
• Air quality (p. 178)

* Option/accessory. 27
INTRODUCTION

IntelliSafe-driver support pedestrians, cyclists or larger animals. If the driver • City Safety (p. 336)
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept concerning does not react to the warning and the risk of col- • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
car safety. It comprises a number of systems, lision is imminent then City Safety can automati-
cally brake the car. • Stability system RSC1 (p. 270)
both standard and optional, that contribute to
making a car journey safe, to the prevention of Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* is another example of a • Seatbelt (p. 58)
injuries and to the protection of passengers and function that helps to prevent accidents by warn- • Safety (p. 56)
other road users. ing the driver and giving corrective steering inter- • Airbags (p. 63)
ventions if the car is about to cross a lane side
Support
line.
• Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
There are systems incorporated in IntelliSafe that • Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
help the driver to drive the car in a safe manner. Also available is the steering assistance function, ture (p. 373)
The driver support functions incorporated in the whose purpose is to reduce the risk of the car
car include e.g. adaptive cruise control*, which unintentionally leaving the road and actively steer • Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)
ensures that a constant distance is held between the car back onto the road.
the car and the vehicle in front.
Protection
Pilot Assist* helps the driver to keep the car To protect the driver and passengers, the car is
between the lane's edge markings, combined equipped with seatbelt tensioners which can ten-
with maintaining a preset time interval to the sion the seatbelts in critical situations and in col-
vehicle ahead. lisions. It also has airbags and inflatable curtains,
Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver park the car by as well as Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)
sensing the area around it. which protects against whiplash injuries.

Other examples of systems that help the driver Related information


are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic Alert • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
(CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* sys- • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393)
tems.
• Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 135)
Prevention • Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
An example of a function that helps to prevent (p. 353)
accidents is City Safety. The function warns the
driver of risks of collision with another vehicle, • BLIS* (p. 349)

1 Roll Stability Control

28 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION

Sensus - online connectivity and Information when it is needed, where it


entertainment is needed
Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet, The different displays in the car provide informa-
use different types of apps and make the car a tion at the right time. The information is shown in
Wi-Fi hotspot. different locations based on how it should be pri-
oritised by the driver.
This is Sensus

Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online


connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive
navigation structure makes it possible to receive
relevant support, information and entertainment
when it is necessary, without distracting the
driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are
connected with entertainment, online connectiv-
ity, navigation* and the user interface between
driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communi-
cation possible between you, the car and the out-
side world.

}}

* Option/accessory. 29
INTRODUCTION

||

Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.

Head-up display* speed information and navigation* information. Driver display


Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls
are also shown in the head-up display. The dis-
play is operated via the right-hand steering wheel
keypad and via the centre display.

12-inch driver display.


The head-up display shows selected information
that the driver should deal with as soon as possi-
ble. Such information includes traffic warnings,

30 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION

Many of the main functions of the car are con- • Driver display (p. 88)
trolled from the centre display, a touch screen • Voice recognition (p. 113)
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore mini- • Online car* (p. 484)
mal. The screen can even be operated while • Audio and media (p. 456)
wearing gloves.
From here, for example, you can control the cli-
mate control system, the entertainment system
and seat position*. The information that is shown
in the centre display can be acted on by the
driver or someone else in the car when the
opportunity arises.
8-inch driver display.
Voice recognition system
The driver display shows information on speed The voice recognition system
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being can be used without the driver
played. The display is operated via the two steer- needing to take his/her hands
ing wheel keypads. off the steering wheel. The sys-
Centre display tem can understand natural
speech. Use voice recognition
to, for example, play back a
song, call someone, increase the temperature or
read out a text message.

For more information about all functions/


systems, see the relevant section in the owner's
manual or its supplement.

Related information
• Operating the centre display (p. 36)
• Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
• Head-up display* (p. 110)

* Option/accessory. 31
INTRODUCTION

The owner's manual and the Windows, glass and mirrors • Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146)
environment The car contains controls for windows, glass
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper origi- and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are
nating from controlled forests. reinforced with lamination, which makes the pas-
senger compartment more soundproof, amongst
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol other things.
shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's
manual comes from FSC®-certified forests or Laminated glass
other controlled sources. The windscreen and panorama* roof have lamina-
ted glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides
better protection against break-ins and improved
sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
Laminated glass is available as an option for cer-
tain other glass surfaces.

The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is


laminated9.
Related information
• Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25) Related information
• Panorama roof* (p. 154)
• Power windows (p. 148)
• Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 188)
• Interior rearview mirror (p. 151)
• Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 149)
• Head-up display* (p. 110)
• Using windscreen wipers (p. 145)

9 Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.

32 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION

Overview of the centre display


Many of the car's functions are controlled from
the centre display. Presented here is the centre
display and its options.

}}

33
INTRODUCTION

||

Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively10.
Function view - car functions that are acti- tions are also so-called trigger functions, ting options. Examples of such are Camera
vated/deactivated with a press. Certain func- which means they open a window with set- and parking functions. Settings for the head-

10 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.

34
INTRODUCTION

up display* are also made from the function Extra subview - recently used apps/car func-
view, but adjustments are made using the tions that do not belong in any of the other
steering wheel's right-hand keypad. subviews. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Home view - the first view that is shown Climate row - information and direct interac-
when the screen is started. tion to set temperature, seat heating level*
Application view (app view) - apps that have and fan speed. Tap on the symbol in the cen-
been downloaded (third-party apps) and tre of the climate row in order to open the
apps for embedded functions, such as FM climate view with more setting options.
radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app.
Related information
Status bar - the activities in the car are • Operating the centre display (p. 36)
shown right at the top of the screen. Net-
work/connection information is shown on the
• Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
left-hand side of the status bar, while media-
related information, the clock and indication • Function view with buttons for car functions
about on-going background activity are (p. 47)
shown on the right. • Changing settings for apps (p. 173)
Top view - drag the tab down in order to • Symbols in the centre display's status bar
access the top view. Settings, Owner's (p. 45)
manual, Profile and the car's saved mes-
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
sages are accessed from here.
• Head-up display* (p. 110)
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview • Media player (p. 463)
to expand it. • Phone (p. 477)
Media - recently used apps associated with • Climate controls in the centre display
media. Tap on the subview to expand it. (p. 181)
Phone - the phone function can be reached • Cleaning the centre display (p. 572)
from here. Tap on the subview to expand it.

* Option/accessory. 35
INTRODUCTION

Operating the centre display views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and mov- IMPORTANT
Many of the car's functions are controlled and ing apps can be performed by touching the
screen in different ways. Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
regulated from the centre display. The centre
they may scratch it.
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch. An infrared film enables the screen to detect a
finger that is just in front of the screen. This tech-
Using the touch screen functionality in nology makes it possible to use the screen even
The table below presents the different proce-
the centre display with gloves on.
dures for operating the screen:
The screen reacts differently depending on Two people can interact with the screen at the
whether you press, drag or swipe across it. same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver
Actions such as browsing between different and passenger side respectively.

Procedure Execution Result


Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick suc- Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map*.
cession.
Press and hold. Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map*. Press and hold your finger against
the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fingers. Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map*.

36 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION

Procedure Execution Result


Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move
apps or map points on the map*. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.

Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the
screen.

Drag apart Zooms in.

Drag together Zooms out.

}}

* Option/accessory. 37
INTRODUCTION

|| Turn off the screen and reactivate it 2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the NOTE
home button.
In home view standard mode - briefly press
> The view that was displayed before the
the home button. An animation that describes
screen was switched off will be shown
access to the different views is shown on the
again.
screen.

NOTE
Moving apps and buttons for car
The screen cannot be deactivated when a
functions
prompt to perform an action is shown on the
The apps and buttons for car functions in the app
screen.
view and function view respectively can be moved
and organised as desired.
NOTE 1. Tap on an app/button and hold depressed.
Home button for the centre display.
The centre display deactivates automatically > The app/button changes size and
When the centre display is switched off, the when the engine is off and the driver's door is becomes slightly transparent. It is then
screen is dimmed so as not to be disruptive opened. possible to move it.
whilst driving. The climate row will still be visible,
and apps and other functions connected to the 2. Drag the app/button to a vacant space in the
screen will continue to run. Returning to home view from another view.
view The maximum number of rows available for use in
1. Give a long press on the physical home but-
1. Briefly press the home button. order to position apps/buttons is 48. To move an
ton below the screen.
> The last position of the home view is app/button outside the visible view, drag it to the
> The screen goes dark except for the cli-
shown. bottom of the view. New rows are then added,
mate row, which continues to be shown.
2. Briefly press again. where the app/button can be located.
All functions continue to run, such as cli-
mate control, audio, guiding* and apps. In > All subviews of the home view are set to An app/button can thus be located further down
this mode, the screen can be cleaned with their default mode. and is then not visible in the normal mode for the
the cloth supplied; see the section view.
"Cleaning the centre display". Swipe across the screen to scroll upward/down-
ward in the view.

38 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION

NOTE Using the controls in the centre display • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 489)
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by
moving them to the bottom, off the visible • Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
screen. This way it will be easier to find the
apps you use more often. • Change settings for the centre display
(p. 46)
Scrolling in a list, article or view
When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it
is possible to scroll downward or upward in the
view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the
view.

Temperature control.
The control is used for many of the car's func-
tions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one
of the following:
• drag the control to the desired temperature,
• tap on +/− in order to raise/lower the tem-
perature gradually, or
• tap on the desired temperature on the con-
trol.

The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it Related information
is possible to scroll in the view. • Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
• Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 29)
• Remote control key range (p. 232)

39
INTRODUCTION

Navigating in the centre display's An app/car function selected from the app/func- NOTE
views tion view starts in the respective subview of the
home view. For example FM radio starts in the The first time the car is used, some of the
There are five different basic views in the centre
Media subview. home view's subviews have no content.
display: home view, top view, climate view, appli-
cation view (app view) and function view. The The extra subview contains the last used app/car
screen is started automatically when the driver's function that is not associated with any of the NOTE
door is opened. other three areas. In home view standard mode - briefly press
The subviews show brief information about each the home button. An animation that describes
Home view different app. access to the different views is shown on the
Home view is the view that is shown when the screen.
screen is started. It consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra sub-
view.

40
INTRODUCTION

Expanding a subview from default mode

Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.

}}

41
INTRODUCTION

|| Expanding a subview: When a new subview is opened in full-screen home view's standard view from full screen mode
mode, no information from the other subviews is - press twice on the home button.
– For subview one, two and three: Press any-
shown.
where on the subview. When a subview is Status bar
expanded, the fourth subview in the home In expanded mode, open the The activities in the car are shown at the top of
view is temporarily forced away. The other app in full screen - press on the screen. Network/connection information is
two are minimised and only certain informa- the symbol. shown on the left-hand side of the status bar,
tion is shown. When the fourth sub view is while media-related information, the clock and
pressed, the other three subviews are mini- indication that background activity is in progress
mised and only certain information is dis- are shown on the right.
played.
Press on the symbol to go back Top view
The expanded view provides access to the to the expanded mode, or press
basic functions of the app. the home button at the bottom
Closing an expanded subview: of the screen.

– The subview can be closed in three different


ways.
• Tap on the upper part of the expanded
subview.
• Tap on another subview (that subview will
then open in expanded mode instead).
• Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
Top view dragged down.
Opening/closing a subview in full screen
mode A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at
The extra subview and the subview for the top of the screen. Open the top view by
Navigation can be opened out in full screen pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from
mode, with even more information and more set- the top downwards across the screen.
ting options. Home button for the centre display.
There is always the option to go back to home
view by pressing the home button. Go back to the

42
INTRODUCTION

In the top view, access is always available to: view. Press on the contextual setting to Application view
access settings that are related to the con-
• Settings tent that is shown on the screen. E.g. press
• Owner's manual Navigation Settings - settings that are
• Profile related to navigation are shown.
• The car's saved messages. • When the contextual owner's manual is avail-
In the top view, access is given to the following in able, it is shown to the right of Owner's
some cases: manual in the top view. Press on the con-
textual owner's manual to access articles in
• Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation the digital owner's manual that are related to
Settings) the content that is shown on the screen. E.g.
• Contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation press Navigation Manual - an article that is
Manual). related to navigation opens.
Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on This only applies to some of the apps in the car.
the home button or at the bottom of the top view For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not
and drag upward. The underlying view is then visi- possible to access app-specific articles or set-
ble and available for use again. tings, for example.

Climate view
NOTE The climate row is always visible at the bottom of
The top view is not available during starting/ the screen. The most common climate settings
shutdown or when a message is shown on can be made directly there, such as setting tem-
perature, seat heating and fan. Application view with the car's apps.
the screen. It is also not available when cli-
mate view is shown. Press the symbol in the centre of the Swipe from right to left11 across the screen in
climate row to open the climate view order to access the application view (app view)
Contextual setting and owner's manual and gain access to more climate set- from the home view. Apps that have been down-
Drag the top view down when an app (e.g. navi- tings. loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded
gation) is running: functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Cer-
Press the symbol to close the climate tain apps show brief information directly in the
• When contextual setting is available, it is view and return to the previous view.
shown to the right of Settings in the top

11 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. }}

43
INTRODUCTION

|| app view, such as the number of unread text Function view Depending on the amount of functions, it is also
messages for Messages. possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do
this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the
subview to which it belongs, such as Media. Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with
a press, a function is activated/deactivated by
Depending on the amount of apps, it is possible
pressing the relevant function button. Some func-
to scroll downward in the app view. Do this by
tions (trigger functions) open in a new window
swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
when pressed.
To move an app:
Just as in app view, it is possible to move the
1. Tap on the app and hold depressed. function buttons around and arrange them in the
> The app becomes slightly transparent and desired order.
larger when it is ready to be moved.
Related information
2. Drag the app to the desired location. • Operating the centre display (p. 36)
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
NOTE
• Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
Apps and car function buttons cannot be
added to locations that are already occupied.
• Function view with buttons for car functions
(p. 47)

Go back to the home view again by swiping from


• Changing settings for apps (p. 173)

left to right11 across the screen, or by pressing • Symbols in the centre display's status bar
the home button.
The function view with buttons for different car func- (p. 45)
tions.
• Climate controls in the centre display
Swipe from left to right11 across the screen in (p. 181)
order to access the function view from the home
view. From here you can activate/deactivate dif-
ferent car functions, e.g. Lane Departure
Warning, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.

11 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.

44 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION

Symbols in the centre display's Symbol Specification • Messages in the driver display and the centre
status bar display (p. 105)
Overview of the symbols that can be shown in Car modem activated.
the centre display's status bar.
USB sharing active.
The status bar shows activities in progress and, in
some cases, their status. Not all symbols are Process in progress.
shown all the time due to the limited space in the
status bar. Timer for preconditioning active.

Symbol Specification Audio source being played back.


Connected to the Internet.
Audio source stopped.
Connection to the Internet failed.
Phone call in progress.
Roaming activated.
Audio source muted.
Signal strength in mobile phone net-
work. News is received from the radio
channel.
Bluetooth device connected.
Traffic information is received.
Bluetooth activated but no device
connected. Clock.

Information sent to and from GPS.


Related information
Connected to Wi-Fi network. • Messages in the driver display and the centre
display (p. 105)
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). • Navigating in the centre display's views
The car then shares the available (p. 40)
connection.

45
INTRODUCTION

Change settings for the centre all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in
display which the background is light and the text is dark.
The centre display is started automatically when This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong day-
the driver's door is opened. The settings can be light.
changed for the centre display to personalise This alternative is always available for the user
sound and themes. The screen can be switched and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
off so as not to be disruptive whilst driving.
Related information
Switching off/changing the system • Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
sounds volume in the centre display.
• Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
The system sounds volume in the centre display ment (p. 29)
can be adjusted or switched off:
• Cleaning the centre display (p. 572)
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display. • Operating the centre display (p. 36)

2. Press Sound System Volumes.


3. Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to
change the volume/switch off screen touch
sounds. Drag the control to the desired vol-
ume.

Changing the appearance of the screen


1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Displays Display
Themes.
3. Then select theme, e.g. Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
As a supplement to these appearances, it is pos-
sible to choose between Normal and Bright.
With Normal, the screen background is dark and
the text is light. This alternative is the default for

46
INTRODUCTION

Function view with buttons for car basic views. Navigate to the function view from Different types of buttons
functions home view by swiping from left to right across There are three different types of buttons for car
All the buttons for car functions are located in the screen12. functions; see below:
the function view, one of the centre display's

Type of button Property Affects car function


Function buttons Have on/off positions. Most buttons in function view are
function buttons.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button.
Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions. • Camera
When a trigger button is pressed, a window for the function opens. For example, it may be a • Headrest fold
window for changing a seat's position. • Head-up display adjustments
Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes. • Park In
Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning. • Park Out

12 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. }}

47
INTRODUCTION

|| The buttons' different modes

The function is deactivated when the LED indica-


When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a tor is extinguished.
function or parking button, the function is acti-
vated. When a function is activated, extra text
with an explanation for certain functions is
shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and
then the button is shown with the LED indicator
illuminated.
For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at
certain speeds is shown, for example, when the
button is depressed.
Briefly tap on the button once in order to acti- When a warning triangle is shown in the right-
vate/deactivate the function. hand section of the button there is something not
working as intended.

Related information
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
• Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
• Categories in the settings menu (p. 166)

48
INTRODUCTION

Using the keyboard in the centre


display
The centre display keyboard makes it possible
make entries using keys. It is also possible to
"draw in" letters and characters on the screen
by hand.

Making entries with the keyboard


The keyboard can be used to enter characters,
letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages
from the car, enter passwords or search for arti-
cles in the digital owner's manual.
The keyboard is only shown when entries can be
made on the screen.

}}

49
INTRODUCTION

||

The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the
keyboard is being used.

50
INTRODUCTION

Row of suggested words or characters13. entry, all letters are automatically lower case Changing the keyboard language
The suggested words are adjusted as new unless otherwise set with the button. To make it possible to switch between different
letters are being entered. Browse among the Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then languages for the keyboard, the languages must
suggestions by pressing on the right and left first be added under Settings.
shown with numbers. Press , which in
arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note
number mode is shown instead of , to Adding/deleting languages in settings
that this function is not supported by all lan-
return to the letter keyboard, or to The keyboard is automatically set to the same
guage selections. If not available, the row will
open the keyboard with special characters. languages as the system language. The keyboard
not be shown on the keyboard.
language can be manually adapted without
The characters available on the keyboard Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The affecting the system language.
depend on which language was selected available characters and word suggestions
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it. (1) vary depending on the selected language. 1. Press Settings in the top view.
One long press opens a list of languages 2.
The button works in different ways, depend- Press System System Languages and
and then tap on the language to be used. A
ing on the context in which the keyboard is Units Keyboard Layouts.
short press changes to the next language on
used - either to enter @ (when an email
the list without showing the list. To add addi- 3. Select one or more languages from the list.
address is entered) or to create a new row
tional languages in the keyboard - see the > It is now possible to switch between the
(for normal text input).
heading "Changing keyboard language" selected languages directly from the key-
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the below.
button is not shown. board for text input.
Space.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again to If no languages have been actively selected
enter one capital letter and then continue Undoes entered text. Press briefly to delete under Settings, the keyboard uses the same lan-
with lower-case letters. Another press makes one character at a time. Hold the button guage as the car's system language; see the
all letters capital letters. The next press depressed to delete characters more quickly. section "Changing system settings in the set-
restores the keyboard to lower-case letters. tings menu".
Changes keyboard mode to write letters and
In this mode, the first letter after a full stop, characters by hand instead. Read more in the
exclamation mark or question mark is a capi- section "Writing characters/letters by hand
tal letter. The first letter in the text field is on the screen".
also a capital letter. In text fields intended for
Press the confirmation button above the key-
names or addresses, each word automatically
board (not visible in the image) to confirm the
starts with a capital letter. In text fields for
entered text. The appearance of the button dif-
password, web address or email address
fers depending on context.

13 Applies to Asiatic languages. }}

51
INTRODUCTION

|| Switching between different languages in Variants of a letter or character


the keyboard
When a number of languages
have been selected in
Settings, the keyboard button
(shown in context as number 7
in the illustration above) is used
to switch between different lan-
guages.
To change keyboard language with list:
1. One long press on the button (see image
above).
> A list opens.
To enter a variant of a letter/character, e.g. é or
2. Select the required language. If more than è:
four languages have been selected under
1. Press and hold the letter/character.
Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list
from the keyboard. > A box with possible variants of the letter/
character opens.
> The keyboard is adapted to the selected
language and other word suggestions are 2. Press the required variant. If none of the vari-
given. ants are selected, the original letter/charac-
ter is entered.
To change the keyboard language without dis-
playing the list:
Related information
– One short press of the button.
• Writing characters/words by hand on the
> The keyboard is adapted to the next lan- screen (p. 53)
guage in the list without displaying the list.
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
• Operating the centre display (p. 36)
• Managing text messages (p. 481)
• Changing system settings in the settings
menu (p. 168)

52
INTRODUCTION

Writing characters/words by hand Suggestions for characters/letters/word/ Writing characters/letters/words by hand


on the screen part of word. It is possible to scroll through 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of
The centre display keyboard allows you to enter the list. a word in the area for hand-written letters
characters, letters and words on the screen by Space. A space can also be created by (1). Write a word or parts of a word above
"drawing" by hand. entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-writ- each other or on a line.
ten letters (1). See the heading "Entering a > A number of suggested characters, letters
Press the button on the key- space in the free text field with handwriting or words is shown (3). The most likely
board to change from typing recognition" below. choice is found at the top of the list.
with the keys to entering letters
and characters by hand. Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character/one letter at a time. Wait a IMPORTANT
moment before pressing again to delete the Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
next character/letter, etc. they may scratch it.
Return to the keyboard with regular charac-
ter input. 2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a
Switch off/on sound when entering. moment.
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the > The character/letter/word at the top of
button is not shown. the list is entered. It is also possible to
select a different character by pressing
Change text input language. the required character, letter or word in
the list.

Area for writing characters/letters/words/


parts of word.
The text field where the characters or word
suggestions appear as they are written on
screen (1).

}}

53
INTRODUCTION

|| Deleting/changing characters/letters written Changing row in the free text field with Related information
by hand handwriting • Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
• Managing text messages (p. 481)
• Changing system settings in the settings
menu (p. 168)

Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping Change row by hand by drawing the above character in
across the handwriting field (1). the handwriting field15.
– There are several options for deleting/ Entering a space in the free text field with
changing characters/letters: handwriting recognition
• Press the intended letter or word in the
list (3).
• Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
• Swipe horizontally from right to left14 over
the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete
multiple letters by swiping over the area
several times.
• Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right16.
all of the entered text.

14 For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
15 For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.
16 For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.

54
SAFETY
SAFETY

Safety WARNING Safety during pregnancy


The vehicle is equipped with several safety sys- It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly
If the warning symbol remains illuminated or
tems that work together to protect the vehicle's is switched on during driving and the mes- during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers
driver and passengers in the event of an acci- sage SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to adjust their seating position.
dent. workshop is shown in the driver display, it
means that part of one of the safety systems Seatbelt
The car is equipped with a number of sensors does not have full functionality. Volvo recom-
that react in the event of an accident and activate mends that an authorised Volvo workshop
different safety systems, such as different types should be contacted as soon as possible.
of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on
the specific accident situation, such as collisions
at different angles, rollover or driving off the road, WARNING
the systems react in different ways to provide the Never modify or repair the car's various safety
best protection. systems yourself. Defective work in one of the
systems can cause malfunction and result in
There are also mechanical safety systems such serious personal injury. Volvo recommends
as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also that an authorised Volvo workshop should be
constructed so that a large part of the force of a contacted.
collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof
and other parts of the body. If the specific warning symbol is broken The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul-
The car's safety mode may be activated after a then the general warning symbol is illu- der then be routed between the breasts and to
collision if an important function in the car has minated instead and the driver display the side of the abdomen.
been damaged. shows the same message.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
Warning symbol in driver display Related information as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must
The warning symbol is illuminated in • Safety during pregnancy (p. 56) never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
the driver display when the car's elec- • Seatbelt (p. 58)
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
trical system is set in ignition position
II. The symbol is extinguished after
• Airbags (p. 63) that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is • Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)
Seating position
fault-free. • Safety mode (p. 69) As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
• Child safety (p. 71) must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-

56
SAFETY

cle as they drive (which means that they must be Whiplash Protection System WARNING
able to easily operate the foot pedals and steer- Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces
ing wheel). The aim should be to position the Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists yourself. Volvo recommends that an author-
seat with as large a distance as possible between of energy-absorbing backrests and seat cush- ised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
abdomen and steering wheel. ions, and specially designed head restraints in
If the front seats have been subjected to a
the front seats.
Related information major load, such as in conjunction with a colli-
• Safety (p. 56) WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end sion, the seats must be replaced. Some of the
seats' protective properties may have been
• Seatbelt (p. 58) collision, where the angle and speed of the colli-
lost even if they do not appear damaged.
sion and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
• Manual front seat (p. 119)
have an influence.
• Power front seat* (p. 120)
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat back-
rests are lowered backward and the seat cush-
ions move downward to change the seating posi-
tion of the driver and front seat passenger. Its
movement helps to absorb some of the forces
that can arise and cause whiplash.

WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under


the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent
WHIPS from functioning.

}}

* Option/accessory. 57
SAFETY

|| WARNING Related information Seatbelt


• Safety (p. 56) Heavy braking can have serious consequences
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's back- • Manual front seat (p. 119) if the seatbelts are not used.
rest. • Power front seat* (p. 120) It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then • Rear Collision Warning (p. 349) body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
any load must be secured to prevent it from not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
sliding up to the front seat backrest in the • Child seats (p. 71)
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
event of a collision.

WARNING
WARNING Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre-
rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat, vents the belt from tightening properly.
the corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not make contact with
the lowered backrest or child seat. WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
Seating position belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
and passenger must have the correct seating
position and make sure that the system's func-
tion is not obstructed.
Set the correct seating position in the front seat
before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.

WHIPS and child seats


The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by WHIPS.

58 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY

WARNING Seatbelt tensioner IMPORTANT


The car is fitted with pyrotechnic and electric
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seat-
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
workshop should be contacted. belts in critical situations and collisions.
side will also be deactivated.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major Seatbelt tensioner during collision
load, such as in conjunction with a collision, All the seatbelts are equipped with a pyrotechnic
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner
seatbelt tensioner. Once the critical situation has passed, the seat-
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear The pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioner tensions the belt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient automatically.
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new force in order to more effectively restrain the
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed If the belt still remains tensioned:
occupant.
for installation at the same location as the 1. Stop the car at a safe place.
replaced seatbelt.
Seatbelt tensioner during critical 2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.
situations* > The seatbelt and electric seatbelt ten-
Related information The driver and front passenger seatbelts are sioner are reset.
• Safety (p. 56) equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59) The seatbelt tensioners work together and can WARNING
• Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60) be activated together with the driver support sys-
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61) tems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
critical situations, such as panic braking, driving workshop should be contacted.
off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off
the ground or hits something in the terrain), skid- If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
ding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be ten-
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
sioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor. the seatbelt's protective properties may have
The electric seatbelt tensioner adjusts the occu- been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
pant to a better position, reducing the risk of damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
striking the car's interior and improving the effect
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
of safety systems, such as the car's airbags. for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.

}}

* Option/accessory. 59
SAFETY

|| Related information Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt 3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be
• Seatbelt (p. 58) Make sure that all passengers have fastened adjusted for height.
• Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60) their seatbelts before starting to drive.
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61) Fastening a seatbelt
• City Safety (p. 336) 1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it
• Rear Collision Warning (p. 349) is not twisted or damaged.

• Activating/deactivating the passenger air-


bag* (p. 65) NOTE
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
• if it is pulled out too quickly
• during braking and acceleration
• if the car leans heavily.

Press together the seat mounting and move


2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in
the seatbelt up or down.
the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has Position the belt as high as possible without
locked. it chafing against your throat.

WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts
and buckles would otherwise possibly not
function as intended in the event of a colli-
sion. There is a risk of serous injury.

60 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY

WARNING Door and seatbelt reminder


The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door,
bonnet, tailgate or fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Driver display graphics
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre-
vents the belt from tightening properly.

WARNING
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor
The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The
the arm). seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not
4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling function as intended in the event of a colli-
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the sion. There is a risk of serous injury.
shoulder.
Unfastening a seatbelt
1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle Graphics in the driver display with different types of
and then let the belt retract. warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is
dependent on the vehicle's speed.
2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in
The driver display's graphics show which seats in
by hand so that it does not hang loose.
the car are occupied by belted and unbelted pas-
Related information sengers.
• Seatbelt (p. 58) The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tail-
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59) gate, fuel filler flap or any door is open.
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61) The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing
the O button on the right-hand steering wheel
keypad.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the
abdomen).

}}

61
SAFETY

|| Seatbelt reminder Rear seat Related information


The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two • Seatbelt (p. 58)
subfunctions: • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
• Provides information on which seatbelts are • Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60)
being used in the rear seat. The driver dis-
play's graphics are shown when the seatbelts
are in use.
• Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is
unfastened during a journey by means of a
visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder
will cease once the seatbelt has been put on
again.
Visual reminder in the roof console. Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
A visual reminder is given in the roof console and and fuel filler flap
by means of the warning symbol in the driver dis- If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is
play. not closed properly, the driver display's graphics
The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed, show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place
driving time and distance. as soon as possible and close the source of the
warning.
The belt status of the driver and passengers is
shown in the driver display graphics when a belt If the car is driven at a speed lower
is buckled or unbuckled. than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's information symbol illu-
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt minates.
reminder system.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
Front seat than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver driver display's warning symbol illumi-
and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if nates.
either of them is not wearing one.

62
SAFETY

Airbags WARNING Driver and passenger airbags


The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
curtains for driver and passengers. make steering difficult. Other safety systems equipped with airbags on the driver and passen-
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust ger sides in the front seat.
WARNING created when the airbags are deployed can
The airbag system's control module is located cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten-
in the centre console. If the centre console is sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
drenched with water or other liquid, discon- cold water. The rapid deployment sequence
nect the cables to the starter battery. Do not and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin
attempt to start the car since the airbags may burns.
deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recom-
mends that it is transported to an authorised Related information
Volvo workshop.
• Safety (p. 56)
• Driver and passenger airbags (p. 63)
Deployed airbags
If any of the airbags have deployed, the following • Side airbag (p. 68)
is recommended: • Inflatable curtain (p. 68)
Driver and passenger airbags1.
• Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it
is transported to an authorised Volvo work- In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help
shop. Do not drive with deployed airbags. to protect the head, face and chest of the driver
• Volvo recommends engaging an authorised and passenger as well as the knees and legs1 of
Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of the driver.
components in the car's safety systems. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
• Always contact a doctor. and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag
cushions the initial collision impact for the occu-
pant. The airbag deflates when compressed by
the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
into the car. This is completely normal. The entire

1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets. }}

63
SAFETY

|| process, including inflation and deflation of the WARNING WARNING


airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo Do not put objects in front of or above the
workshop should be contacted for repair. dashboard where the passenger airbag is
NOTE Defective work in the airbag system could located.
The detectors react differently depending on cause malfunction and result in serious per-
the nature of the collision and whether or not sonal injury.
the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt
positions. Driver airbags
It is therefore possible that only one (or none) Airbag in the steering wheel
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering
detectors sense the force of the collision on wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
the vehicle and the action is adapted accord- Knee airbag1
ingly so that none, one or more airbags are The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the
deployed. instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover
panel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt WARNING
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may Do not place or attach any object on the top
diminish the protection provided by the airbag or front of the panel where the knee airbag is
in the event of a collision. stowed.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as Passenger airbag
possible with their feet on the floor and backs The airbag is folded up into a compartment
against the backrest.
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.

1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.

64
SAFETY

Label for passenger airbag WARNING Activating/deactivating the


passenger airbag*
If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air- The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the
bag will always be activated. car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag
Cut Off Switch (PACOS).

WARNING Switch
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of The switch for the passenger airbag is located on
the front passenger seat. the passenger end of the instrument panel and is
accessible when the passenger door is open.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated. Check that the switch is in the required position.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.

Related information
• Airbags (p. 63)
• Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 65)

ON - the airbag is activated and all front-fac-


ing passengers (children and adults) can sit
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label safely on the passenger seat.
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened. OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children
The warning label for the passenger airbag is in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the
positioned as shown above. passenger seat.

}}

* Option/accessory. 65
SAFETY

|| WARNING Activating the passenger airbag 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air-
bag will always be activated.

Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF


(B) to ON (A).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please
acknowledge. > A text message and a warning symbol in
the roof console indicate that the airbag
for the front passenger seat is activated.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/ WARNING
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
or lower, a message is shown in the driver passenger seat when the airbag is activated.
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's The passenger airbag must always be acti-
electrical system has been set in ignition vated when front-facing passengers (children
and adults) are sitting in the front passenger
position II. seat.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.

66
SAFETY

Deactivating the passenger airbag 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- Related information
hand steering wheel keypad's O button. • Driver and passenger airbags (p. 63)
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
• Child seats (p. 71)

Pull the switch outward and turn from ON


(A) to OFF (B).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag off Please
acknowledge. > A text message and a symbol in the roof
console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is deactivated.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/ WARNING
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
or lower, a message is shown in the driver must never sit on the passenger seat when
display and the following indicator in the roof the airbag is deactivated.
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
position II. injury.

IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.

67
SAFETY

Side airbag WARNING Inflatable curtain


The side airbags on the driver and passenger The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
seats protect the chest and hip in the event of a workshop should be contacted for repair. helps to prevent the driver and passengers from
collision. Defective work in the side airbag system striking their heads on the inside of the car dur-
could cause malfunction and result in serious ing a collision.
personal injury.

WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the
outside of the seat and the door panel, since
this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat
covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers
may impede the operation of the side airbags.

WARNING
The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts.
frames of the front seats and help to protect the Always use a seatbelt. The inflatable curtain is mounted along both
driver and passengers in the front seat. sides of the headlining and helps protect the
driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors Side airbag and child seats panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag The protection provided by the car to children
inflates between the occupant and the door seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The not diminished by the side airbag. and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on the Related information WARNING
side of the collision. • Airbags (p. 63)
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
• Child seats (p. 71) workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the inflatable curtain system
can cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.

68
SAFETY

WARNING Safety mode WARNING


Safety mode is a protective state that is trig-
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
handles in the roof. The hooks are only gered when a collision may have damaged any electronics yourself if the car has been in
designed for light coats and jackets (not for of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, safety mode. This could result in personal
solid objects such as umbrellas). sensors for any of the safety systems, or the injury or the car not functioning as normal.
brake system. Volvo recommends that engaging an author-
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's
ised Volvo workshop to check and restore the
headlining, door pillars or side panels. This If the car has been in a collision, the message car to normal status after Safety mode See
could compromise the intended protection.
Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine Safety mode See Owner's manual may be Owner's manual has been shown.
parts that are approved for fitting within these shown on the driver display with a warning sym-
areas. bol as long as the display is not damaged and the
car's electrical system is still in working order. WARNING
This message means that the car has reduced If the car is in safety mode it must not be
WARNING functionality. towed. It must be transported from its loca-
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
load and the side windows if the car is loaded to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
to above the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the Never, under any circumstances, attempt to Related information
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
headlining, may be compromised. Safety mode See Owner's manual mes- • Safety (p. 56)
sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the • Starting/moving the car after safety mode
car at once. (p. 70)
WARNING
• Recovering the car (p. 454)
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. attempt to reset the system in order to start and
move the car for a short distance, if in a danger-
Related information ous traffic situation for example.
• Airbags (p. 63)

69
SAFETY

Starting/moving the car after safety 3. Then try to start the car. Related information
mode > The car's electronics carry out a systems • Safety mode (p. 69)
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to check and then try to resume normal sta- • Recovering the car (p. 454)
attempt to reset the system in order to start and tus.
move the car for a short distance, if in a danger-
ous traffic situation for example. IMPORTANT
Starting the car after safety mode If the message Safety mode See Owner's
1. Check the general damage situation of the manual is still shown on the display the car
car and whether any fuel has been leaking. must not be driven or towed but a vehicle
There must be no smell of fuel either. recovery service must then be used instead.
Even if the car appears to be driveable, hid-
If there is only minor damage and a check den damage may make the car impossible to
has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be control once moving.
attempted.

WARNING Moving the car after safety mode


Never, under any circumstances, attempt to 1. If the driver display shows the message
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Normal mode The car is now in normal
Safety mode See Owner's manual mes- mode after a start attempt, the car can be
sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the
car at once. carefully moved if standing in a dangerous
position.
2. Turn the start knob clockwise to switch off 2. Do not move the car further than necessary.
the car.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.

70
SAFETY

Child safety Related information Child seats


Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, • Safety (p. 56) The position of a child in the car and the choice
booster cushions and attachment devices) • Child seats (p. 71) of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
which is designed for fitting in this particular car. and size.

Using Volvo's child safety equipment, the opti- Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make
mum conditions are obtained for the child to sure that the child seat is being used correctly.
travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety
Look in the installation instructions for the child
equipment fits well and is simple to use.
seat for the correct fitting.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to NOTE
sit on the knee of a passenger.
When using child safety products it is impor-
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- tant to read the installation instructions
facing child seats until as late an age as possible, included.
at least up to 3-4 years of age, and then in front-
facing booster cushions/child seats until the
child is 140 cm tall. NOTE
Never leave a child seat unsecured in the car.
NOTE Always secure it according to the instructions
Legal provisions about the type of child seat for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.

NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer for
clearer instructions.

}}

71
SAFETY

|| Location of child seats WARNING Installation in the front seat


• When fitting rear-facing child seats, check
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
• When fitting front-facing child seats, check
passenger seat if the airbag is activated. that the passenger airbag is activated.

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) • Only use child seats that are recommended
must never sit on the front passenger seat if by Volvo, are universally approved or are
the passenger airbag is deactivated. semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal • ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when
injury. the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console2
accessory.
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible. Child seat installation • If the child seat is equipped with lower
Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat The following points are important to consider straps, Volvo recommends that the lower
if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is when a child seat is being fitted in the car. mounting points are used with these2.
sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she • The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to
could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys. WARNING facilitate child seat installation.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear- Booster cushions/child seats with steel
facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas- braces or some other design that could rest
senger seat. on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt
buckle to open accidentally.
NOTE Do not secure the straps for the child seat
Regulations regarding the placement of chil- into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in
dren in cars vary from country to country. springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp
Check what does apply. edges may damage the straps.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.

2 The accessory range varies depending on market.

72
SAFETY

Installation in the rear seat Label for passenger airbag Related information
• Only use child seats that are recommended • Child safety (p. 71)
by Volvo, are universally approved or are • Upper mounting points for child seats
semi-universal, and where the car is included (p. 74)
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
• Lower mounting points for child seats
• A child seat with support legs must not be (p. 74)
fitted in the centre seat.
• i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 78)
• The outer seats are equipped with the
ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i- • Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 65)
Size3.
• The outer seats are equipped with upper
mounting points. Volvo recommends that
child seat's upper straps should be pulled Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
through the hole in the head restraint before
being tensioned at the mounting point. If this
is not possible, follow the recommendations
from the child seat manufacturer.
• If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, never adjust the position of the seat
in front after the straps have been fitted in
the lower mounting points. Always remember
to remove the lower straps when the child
seat is not installed.

Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label


becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.

3 Varies depending on market.

* Option/accessory. 73
SAFETY

Upper mounting points for child WARNING Lower mounting points for child
seats seats
The child seat's upper straps must be routed
The car is equipped with upper mounting points through the hole in the head restraint leg The car is equipped with lower mounting points
for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats. before they are tensioned at the mounting for child seats in the front seat* and the rear
point. If this is not possible, follow the recom- seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended mendations from the child seat manufacturer.
for use with front-facing child seats. The lower mounting points are designed to be
Always follow the manufacturer's installation used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child
NOTE seats.
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
upper mounting points. Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate Always follow the manufacturer's installation
fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold- instructions when connecting a child seat to the
The location of the mounting points ing head restraints on the outer seats. lower mounting points.

The location of the mounting points


NOTE
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed before
child seats can be attached to the securing
points.

Related information
• Child seats (p. 71)
• Lower mounting points for child seats
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on (p. 74)
the rear of the backrest.
• i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 78)
The mounting points are located on the rear of Mounting point locations in the front seat.
• Table for location of child seats using the
the rear seat's outer seats. car's seatbelts (p. 76) The mounting points in the front seat are located
on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom.

74 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY

The mounting points in the front seat are only


mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch
to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.

Mounting point locations in the rear seat.


The mounting points in the rear seat are located
on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.

Related information
• Child seats (p. 71)
• Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
• i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 78)
• Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 76)
• Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 65)

* Option/accessory. 75
SAFETY

Table for location of child seats NOTE


using the car's seatbelts
Always read the section "Child seats" before
The table gives a recommendation for which
fitting a child seat in the car.
child seats suit which locations, and for what
size of child.

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
child seats) child seats)
Group 0
UA, B X UB UB
max 10 kg
Group 0+
UA, B X UB UB
max 13 kg
Group 1
LC UFA, D UD, LC UD
9-18 kg
Group 2
LC UFA, E UE, LC UE
15-25 kg

76
SAFETY

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
child seats) child seats)
Group 3
X UFA, E UE UE
22-36 kg
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A Adjust the backrest to a more upright position.
B Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
C Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
D Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
E Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).

WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.

Related information
• Child seats (p. 71)
• Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
• Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 79)
• Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 82)

77
SAFETY

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points Related information


The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX4 mount- • Child seats (p. 71)
ing points for child seats in the rear seat. • Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child • Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
seats that is based on an international standard. • Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 82)
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points. (p. 79)

The location of the mounting points

Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols4 on


the upholstery of the backrest.
The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are
located behind covers in the lower section of the
rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.
Lift the covers in order to access the mounting
points.

4 Names and symbols change depending on market.

78
SAFETY

Table for location of ISOFIX child The child seat must be approved in accordance NOTE
seats with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be
included in the manufacturer's vehicle list. Always read the section "Child seats" before
The table gives a recommendation for which
fitting a child seat in the car.
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.

Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air- Front seat (with activated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
bag, only rear-facing child bag, only front-facing child
seats)B seats)B
Group 0
E Rear-facing infant seat ILB, C, XD X ILC X
max 10 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
Group 0+
C Rear-facing child seat ILB, C, E, XD X ILC X
max 13 kg
D Rear-facing child seat

}}

79
SAFETY

|| Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air- Front seat (with activated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
bag, only rear-facing child bag, only front-facing child
seats)B seats)B
A Front-facing child seat
B Front-facing child seat X ILB, E, F, XD ILF, IUFF X
Group 1
B1 Front-facing child seat
9-18 kg
C Rear-facing child seat
ILB, E, XD X IL X
D Rear-facing child seat
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal catego-
ries.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
B Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
C Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
D Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
E Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not touch the child seat.
F Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.

WARNING NOTE NOTE


Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is classification, the car model must be included Volvo dealer for information about which i-
activated. on the vehicle list for the child seat. Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.

Related information
• Child seats (p. 71)
• i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 78)

80
SAFETY

• Table for location of i-Size child seats


(p. 82)
• Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 76)

81
SAFETY

Table for location of i-Size child The child seat must be approved in accordance NOTE
seats with UN Reg R129.
Always read the section "Child seats" before
The table gives a recommendation for which i-
fitting a child seat in the car.
Size child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.

Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear- Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-fac- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
facing child seats) ing child seats)
i-Size child seats X X i-UA, B X

i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
B Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4-129R-000002).

Related information
• Child seats (p. 71)
• i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 78)
• Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 79)
• Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 76)

82
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instruments and controls, left-hand Display/function/control Display/function/control


drive car
The overviews show where the displays and Right-hand steering wheel keypad Front reading lamps and interior lighting
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel adjustment Panorama roof*

Horn Display in roof console

Left-hand steering wheel keypad Manual dimming of interior rearview mir-


ror
Bonnet opening

Display lighting, tailgate unlocking, tail-


gate opening/closing*, halogen head-
lamp levelling

Display/function/control
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Display/function/control
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox* Centre display

Head-up display* Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/


heated windscreen*, media, glovebox
Driver display door opening
Wipers and washing, rain sensor* Gear selector

84 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Display/function/control Display/function/control Instruments and controls, right-


hand drive car
Start knob Power windows, door mirrors The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Drive mode control* Adjusting front seat

Parking brake
Related information
Automatic braking when stationary • Steering wheel (p. 129)
• Manual front seat (p. 119)
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
• Lighting control (p. 131)
• Climate controls (p. 180)
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)

Display/function/control
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
Display/function/control rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter

Memory for setup of: Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
• Power front seat*
• Door mirrors Head-up display*

• Head-up display* Driver display


Door opening, locking/unlocking of side Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
doors and tailgate
}}

* Option/accessory. 85
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Display/function/control Display/function/control Display/function/control


Right-hand steering wheel keypad Front reading lamps and interior lighting Start knob

Display lighting, unlocking the tailgate, Panorama roof* Drive mode control*
opening/closing the tailgate*
Display in roof console Parking brake
Bonnet opening
Manual dimming of interior rearview mir- Automatic braking when stationary
Horn ror
Steering wheel adjustment

Left-hand steering wheel keypad

Display/function/control
Display/function/control
Memory for setup of:
Centre display
• Power front seat*
Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/ • Door mirrors
heated windscreen*, media, glovebox
door opening
• Head-up display*
Door opening, locking/unlocking of side
Gear selector
doors and tailgate

86 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Display/function/control
Power windows, door mirrors

Adjusting front seat

Related information
• Steering wheel (p. 129)
• Manual front seat (p. 119)
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
• Lighting control (p. 131)
• Climate controls (p. 180)
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)

* Option/accessory. 87
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Driver display WARNING Driver display, 12-inch*


The driver display shows information about the
If the driver display should extinguish, not illu-
car and driving. minate on activation/start or be fully or parti-
ally illegible, the car must not be used. You
The driver display contains gauges, indicators and
should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo
indicator and warning symbols. The content of recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
the driver display depends on the car's equip-
ment, settings and which functions are active at
that time.
The driver display is available in two versions, 12-
inch* and 8-inch.

WARNING
In the event of a fault in the driver display the
information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other
safety systems may not be shown. In which
case, the driver cannot check the status of
the car's systems or receive current warnings
and information.

Location in the driver display:


On the left In the middle On the right
Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer/ECO gaugeA
Trip meter Outside temperature gauge Gear shift indicator

OdometerB Clock Drive mode


(Comfort, Off Road, Eco, Dynamic or Individual)
Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge

88 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

On the left In the middle On the right

Road Sign Information* Door and seatbelt information Status of the Start/Stop function
– Media player Distance to empty tank
– Navigation map* Instantaneous fuel consumption
– Phone App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
– Voice recognition –
– CompassA –
A Depends on drive mode selected.
B Accumulated mileage.

Driver display, 8-inch

}}

* Option/accessory. 89
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Location in the driver display:


On the left In the middle On the right
Fuel gauge Speedometer Media player
Drive mode Road Sign Information* Phone
(Comfort, Off Road, Eco, Dynamic or Individual)
Gear shift indicator Cruise control and speed limiter information Navigation information*

Tachometer/ECO gaugeA Door and seatbelt information Clock

Distance to empty tank Status of the Start/Stop function App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
Outside temperature gauge – Instantaneous fuel consumption
Indicator and warning symbols – OdometerB
– – Trip meter
– – Indicator and warning symbols
– – Voice recognition
– – Engine temperature gauge
– – Messages, in some cases with graphics
– – CompassA
A Depends on drive mode selected.
B Accumulated mileage.

90 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Dynamic symbol display extinguishes after a while if it is not used.


The dynamic symbol in its basic To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following:
form.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Turn the ignition knob to ignition position to I.
• Open one of the doors.

Related information
The centre of the driver display contains a • Driver display settings (p. 92)
dynamic symbol that changes appearance for dif-
• Indicator symbols in the driver display
ferent types of message. It can show an indicator (p. 93)
or warning symbol, or consist of an image
sequence that starts from this position and is • Warning symbols in the driver display
then converted to a larger image to clarify infor- (p. 95)
mation. • Application menu in the driver display
(p. 103)
• Fuel gauge (p. 97)
• License agreement for the driver display
(p. 98)

Example of indicator symbol in the 12-inch driver display.

Activating the driver display


The driver display is activated as soon as a door
is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver

91
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Driver display settings 3. Select what should be shown in the back- 2. Tap on System System Languages and
Settings for the driver display can be made in ground: Units System Language to select lan-
the driver display's application menu and in the • Show no information in background guage.
centre display's Settings menu.
• Show information for current playing > A change will affect the language in all
Settings in the app menu media displays.
In the app menu, you can choose which informa- • Show navigation even if no route is Related information
tion is shown on the driver display from set1. • Driver display (p. 88)
• trip computer The 12-inch driver display* shows the infor- • Application menu in the driver display
• media player mation in the centre, and the 8-inch driver (p. 103)
display shows the information in the top
• phone
right-hand field.
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
• navigation system*.
Selecting theme
The application menu in the driver display is 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
opened and navigated using the steering wheel's view.
right-hand keypad, see the section "Using the
application menu in the driver display". 2. Tap on My Car Displays Display
Themes
Settings in the centre display
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
Selecting information type display:
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view. • Glass

2.
• Minimalistic
Press My Car Displays Driver
Display Information. • Performance
• Chrome Rings.
Selecting language
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.

1 The map is only shown with 12-inch driver display*. In the 8-inch driver display, only guidance is shown. For more information, see the section "Displays and controls for map navigation" and "Map navigation in
the driver display".

92 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Indicator symbols in the driver Symbol Specification Symbol Specification


display
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func- Automatic brake on Left and right-hand direction
tion is activated, that a system is operating, or indicator
The symbol illuminates when the
that a fault or abnormal condition exists. function is activated and the foot The symbols flash when the direc-
brake or parking brake is acting. tion indicators are used.
Symbol Specification The brake holds the car stationary
when it has stopped.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems Tyre pressure system
Position lamps
does not behave as intended, this The symbol illuminates when tyre
information symbol illuminates and pressure is too low. If there is a The symbol lights up when the
a text appears on the driver display. fault in the tyre pressure system, position lamps are switched on.
The information symbol can also the symbol will flash for approx. 1
illuminate in conjunction with other Fault in the headlamp system
minute and then illuminate with a
symbols. constant glow. This may be The symbol illuminates if a fault
because the system cannot detect has occurred in the ABL function
Fault in brake system (Active Bending Lights) or if
or warn of low tyre pressure as
The symbol lights up when there is intended. another fault has occurred in the
a fault in the parking brake. headlamp system.
Emissions system
ABS fault Active main beam on
If the symbol illuminates after the
If this symbol illuminates then the engine has been started then it The symbol lights up blue when the
system is not working. The car's may be due to a fault in the car's automatic main beam is on.
regular brake system continues to emissions system. Drive to a work-
work, but without the ABS function. Active main beam off
shop for checking. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo The symbol lights up white when
workshop is contacted. the automatic main beam is off.

}}

93
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Symbol Specification Symbol Specification Symbol Specification


Main beam On Rain sensor on Lane assistance
The symbol illuminates when main This symbol illuminates when the White symbol: Lane assistance is
beam is on and with main beam rain sensor is on. on and road lines are detected.
flash.
Preconditioning on Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
Active main beam on but road lines are not detected.
The symbol illuminates when the
The symbol lights up blue when engine block and passenger com- Yellow symbol: Lane assistance
active main beam is on. Position partment heater/air conditioning warns/intervenes.
lamps are switched on. are preconditioning the car.
Lane assistance and rain sensor
Active main beam off Stability system White symbol: Lane assistance is
The symbol lights up white when A flashing symbol indicates that on and road lines are detected.
active main beam is off. Position the stability system is operating. If Rain sensor is on.
lamps are switched on. the symbol illuminates with con- Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
stant glow then there is a fault in but road lines are not detected.
Main beam On the system. Rain sensor is on.
The symbol lights up when main
Stability system, sport mode
beam and the position lamps are Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
switched on. The symbol illuminates when the and fuel filler flap
sport mode is activated. Sport If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not
Front fog lamps on mode allows for a more active driv- closed properly then the information or warning
This symbol illuminates when the ing experience. The system then symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis-
front fog lamp is switched on. detects whether the accelerator play.
pedal, steering wheel movements
Rear fog lamp on and cornering are more active than Related information
This symbol illuminates when the in normal driving and then allows • Driver display (p. 88)
rear fog lamp is switched on. controlled skidding of the rear sec-
tion up to a certain level before it
• Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 95)
intervenes and stabilises the car.
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61)

94
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Warning symbols in the driver Symbol Specification Symbol Specification


display
The warning symbols alert the driver that an Warning Fault in brake system
important function is activated or that a serious The red warning symbol illuminates If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fault or condition exists. when a fault has been indicated fluid level may be too low. Visit the
which could affect the safety nearest authorised workshop to
WARNING and/or driveability of the car. An have the brake fluid level checked
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the explanatory text is shown on the and rectified.
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further driver display at the same time. The
warning symbol can also illuminate Parking brake applied
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated in conjunction with other symbols. This symbol illuminates with a con-
by a workshop. Volvo recommends contacting stant glow when the parking brake
Seatbelt reminder
an authorised Volvo workshop. is applied.
This symbol flashes if someone in
A flashing symbol means that a
a front seat has not put on their
WARNING fault has arisen. Read the message
seatbelt or if someone in a rear
in the driver display.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the seat has taken off their seatbelt.
same time, there is a risk that the rear end will Low oil pressure
skid during heavy braking. Airbags
If this symbol illuminates during
If the symbol remains illuminated or
driving then the engine's oil pres-
illuminates while driving, a fault has
sure is too low. Stop the engine
been detected in one of the car's
immediately and check the engine
safety systems. Read the message
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
in the driver display. Volvo recom-
symbol illuminates and the oil level
mends that an authorised Volvo
is normal, contact a workshop.
workshop is contacted.
Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop is contacted.

}}

95
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Symbol Specification Outside temperature gauge – Select Settings System System


The outside temperature gauge is shown in the Languages and Units Units of
Alternator not charging driver display. Measurement and select the required unit
This symbol illuminates during driv- type, Metric, Imperial or US.
A sensor detects the temperature outside of the
ing if a fault has occurred in the
car. Related information
electrical system. Visit a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an author- • Driver display (p. 88)
ised Volvo workshop is contacted. • Climate control - sensors (p. 177)
Collision risk
City Safety warns of a risk of colli-
sion with other vehicles, pedes-
trians, cyclists or large animals.

Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate


and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not
closed properly then the information or warning Outside temperature gauge location in the 12-inch and
symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis- 8-inch driver display.
play.
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may dis-
Related information play a temperature reading that is too high.
• Driver display (p. 88) When the outside temperature is within the range
• Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 93) -5 °C to +2 °C (23 till 36 °F) a snowflake symbol
is also shown in the driver display as a warning
• Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61)
for potentially slippery conditions. The snowflake
• Safety (p. 56) symbol is also illuminated briefly in the head-up
display, if the car is equipped with one.

Outside temperature gauge setting


Change the unit for the temperature gauge via
the centre display's top view.

96
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Clock Automatic time for cars with GPS Fuel gauge


The clock is shown in both the driver display and If the car is equipped with a navigation system The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the
the centre display. then Auto Time can be selected. The time zone fuel level in the tank.
is then adjusted automatically based on the loca-
Location tion of the car. For certain types of navigation
systems, the current location (country) must also
be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time
is not selected, time and data are adjusted with
arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.
Summer time
In certain countries, it is possible to select auto-
matic setting of summer time with Auto. For
other countries, summer time can be set with On
or Off.

Related information
• Driver display (p. 88) Fuel gauge in the 12-inch driver display.
Clock location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display. The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
In the centre display, the clock is located at the quantity of fuel in the tank.
top right of the status bar. When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
In certain situations, messages and information refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and
may cover the clock in the driver display. changes to amber colour. The trip computer also
indicates distance to empty tank, see the section
Settings for time and date "Trip computer".
Select Settings System Date and Time
in the centre display's top view to change set-
tings for time and date format.
Adjust time and date by pressing the up or down
arrow on the touch screen.

}}

97
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| License agreement for the driver 4. Neither the name of the University nor the
display names of its contributors may be used to
A license is an agreement for the right to oper- endorse or promote products derived from
ate a certain activity or the right to use someone this software without specific prior written
else's entitlement according to the terms and permission.
conditions in the agreement. The following text is THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/devel- REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
oper. ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
License AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
Fuel gauge in the 8-inch driver display. The Regents of the University of California. All REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
The bars in the fuel gauge indicate the quantity rights reserved. FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
of fuel in the tank. Redistribution and use in source and binary SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
forms, with or without modification, are permitted DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and provided that the following conditions are met:
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
changes to amber colour. The trip computer also 1. Redistributions of source code must retain OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
indicates distance to empty tank, see the section the above copyright notice, this list of CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
"Trip computer". When the fuel level is critically conditions and the following disclaimer. WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
low, only one amber-coloured bar remains. Refuel 2. Redistributions in binary form must OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
the car as soon as possible. reproduce the above copyright notice, this list OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
of conditions and the following disclaimer in THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
Related information
the documentation and/or other materials ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
• Trip computer (p. 161)
provided with the distribution. DAMAGE.
• Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
3. All advertising materials mentioning features
elling (p. 439) BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised"
or use of this software must display the
License
following acknowledgement: This product
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.

98
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Redistribution and use in source and binary WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
forms, with or without modification, are permitted OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
provided that the following conditions are met: OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
the above copyright notice, this list of
DAMAGE. CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
conditions and the following disclaimer.
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
2. Redistributions in binary form must BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
of conditions and the following disclaimer in reserved. THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
the documentation and/or other materials ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
Redistribution and use in source and binary
provided with the distribution. DAMAGE.
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the provided that the following conditions are met: The views and conclusions contained in the
names of its contributors may be used to software and documentation are those of the
endorse or promote products derive from this 1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of authors and should not be interpreted as
software without specific prior written representing official policies, either expressed or
permission. conditions and the following disclaimer.
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE 2. Redistributions in binary form must
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS reproduce the above copyright notice, this list FreeType Project License
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED of conditions and the following disclaimer in 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED the documentation and/or other materials Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF provided with the distribution. Introduction The FreeType Project is
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE distributed in several archive packages; some
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS of them may contain, in addition to the
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED FreeType font engine, various tools and
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FreeType Project. This license applies to all
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A files found in such packages, and which do
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN not fall under their own explicit license. The
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER license affects thus the FreeType font
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY engine, the test programs, documentation
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, and makefiles, at the very least. This license

}}
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG

99
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which license applies to all files distributed in the that you understand and accept all the terms
all encourage inclusion and use of free original FreeType archive, including all source of this license.
software in commercial and freeware code, binaries and documentation, unless 2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in
products alike. As a consequence, its main otherwise stated in the file in its original, source and binary forms, with or without
points are that: o We don't promise that this unmodified form as distributed in the original modification, are permitted provided that the
software works. However, we are be archive. If you are unsure whether or not a following conditions are met: o Redistribution
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' particular file is covered by this license, you of source code must retain this license file
distribution) o You can use this software for must contact us to verify this. The FreeType (`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions,
whatever you want, in parts or full form, project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David deletions or changes to the original files
without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner must be clearly indicated in accompanying
usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote Lemberg. All rights reserved except as documentation. The copyright notices of the
this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, specified below. 1. No Warranty THE unaltered, original files must be preserved in
in a program, you must acknowledge FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS' all copies of source files. o Redistribution in
somewhere in your documentation that WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, binary form must provide a disclaimer that
you've used the FreeType code. (`credits') EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, states that the software is based in part of
We specifically permit and encourage the INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, the work of the FreeType Team, in the
inclusion of this software, with or without WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND distribution documentation. We also
modifications, in commercial products, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. encourage you to put an URL to the
provided that all warranty or liability claims IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE FreeType web page in your documentation,
are assumed by the product vendor. Legal AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE though this isn't mandatory. These conditions
Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY apply to any software derived from or based
the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF on the FreeType code, not just the
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not unmodified files. If you use our work, you
originally distributed by the authors (David signed this license, you are not required to must acknowledge us. However, no fee need
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner accept it. However, as the FreeType project be paid to us.
Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they is copyrighted material, only this license, or
named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' another one contracted with the authors, 3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors
refers to the licensee, or person using the grants you the right to use, distribute, and and contributors may not be used to endorse
project, where `using' is a generic term modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or or promote products derived from this
including compiling the project's source code modifying the FreeType project, you indicate software without specific prior written
as well as linking it to form a `program' or permission. We suggest, but do not require,
`executable'. This program is referred to as `a that you use one or more of the following
program using the FreeType engine'. This phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials:

100
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96,
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. 1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same
to FreeType: o freetype@freetype.org distributed according to the same disclaimer and disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the
Discusses general use and applications of license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following following individuals added to the list of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted individuals added to the list of Contributing Contributing Authors:
additions to the library and distribution. If you Authors
John Bowler
are looking for support, start in this list if you Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Kevin Bracey
haven't found anything to help you in the
Eric S. Raymond
documentation. o devel@freetype.org Sam Bushell
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, Gilles Vollant
Magnus Holmgren
design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current Greg Roelofs
FreeType web page, which will allow you to There is no warranty against interference with
Tom Tanner
download our latest development version and your enjoyment of the library or against
read online documentation. You can also infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
contact us individually at: David Turner or the library will fulfill any of your particular January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy
<david.turner@freetype.org> Robert Wilhelm purposes or needs. This library is provided with all Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
<robert.wilhelm@freetype.org> Werner faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, For the purposes of this copyright and license,
Lemberg <werner.lemberg@freetype.org> performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through set of individuals:
Libpng License
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, Andreas Dilger
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy Dave Martindale
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
between this copy and the notices in the file
license as libpng-0.96, with the following Guy Eric Schalnat
png.h that is included in the libpng distribution,
individuals added to the list of Contributing
the latter shall prevail. Paul Schmidt
Authors:
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and Tim Wegner
Tom Lane
LICENSE:
Glenn Randers-Pehrson The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS".
If you modify libpng you may insert additional
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
notices immediately following this sentence. Willem van Schaik disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied,

}}
including, without limitation, the warranties of

101
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31). OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
special, exemplary, or consequential damages, OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software.
which may result from the use of the PNG ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark
Reference Library, even if advised of the WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
of the Open Source Initiative.
possibility of such damage. OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, zlib License
April 15, 2002
modify, and distribute this source code, or The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, MIT License <copyright holders>
subject to the following restrictions: Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
1. The origin of this source code must not be Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to express or implied warranty. In no event will the
misrepresented. any person obtaining a copy of this software and authors be held liable for any damages arising
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as associated documentation files (the "Software"), from the use of this software.
such and must not be misrepresented as to deal in the Software without restriction,
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
being the original source. including without limitation the rights to use,
software for any purpose, including commercial
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
altered from any source or altered source sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
distribution. and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following 1. The origin of this software must not be
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. conditions: misrepresented; you must not claim that you
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage wrote the original software. If you use this
the use of this source code as a component to The above copyright notice and this permission
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
supporting the PNG file format in commercial notice shall be included in all copies or
the product documentation would be
products. If you use this source code in a product, substantial portions of the Software.
appreciated but is not required.
acknowledgment is not required but would be THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
appreciated. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
marked as such, and must not be
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
misrepresented as being the original
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like: LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
software.
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND 3. This notice may not be removed or altered
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL from any source distribution.

102
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

SGI Free Software B License Version OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE Application menu in the driver
2.0. SOFTWARE. display
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Except as contained in this notice, the name of Application menu (app menu) in the driver dis-
Sept. 18, 2008) Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in play provides quick access to commonly used
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use functions for certain apps.
Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is or other dealings in this Software without prior
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
Related information
the Software without restriction, including without • Driver display (p. 88)
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: The above copyright notice
including the dates of first publication and either
this permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
The app menu in the driver display can be used instead
all copies or substantial portions of the Software. of using the centre display.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", The app menu is shown in the driver display and
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, is controlled using the steering wheel's right-
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT hand keypad. The app menu makes it easy to
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF switch between different apps or functions within
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A the apps without having to let go of the steering
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND wheel and take your eyes off the road.
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY App menu functions
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, Different apps give access to different types of
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, functions. The following apps and their associ-
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT ated functions can be controlled from the app
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE menu:

}}

103
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| App Functions Using the application menu in the Opening/closing the app menu
driver display – Press on open/close (1).
Trip com- Selection of trip meter, selection The application menu (the app menu) in the (It is not possible to open the app menu
puter of what to show in the driver dis- driver display is operated with the steering while there is an unacknowledged message
play, etc. wheel's right-hand keypad. in the driver display. The message must be
Media Selection of active source for confirmed before the app menu can be
player the media player. opened.)
> The app menu opens/closes.
Phone Calling a contact from the call
list. The app menu closes automatically after a period
of inactivity or after certain options have been
Navigation Pause guide, start guide to selected.
recently used destination, etc.
Navigating and selecting in the app
Related information menu
• Driver display (p. 88) 1. Navigate between the different apps that are
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33) available by tapping on left or right (2).
• Using the application menu in the driver dis- > Functions for previous/next app are
play (p. 104) The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand key- shown in the app menu.
pad.
2. Browse through the functions for the
Open/close
selected app by tapping on up or down (3).
Left/right 3. Confirm or highlight an option for the func-
tion by pressing on confirm (4).
Up/down
> The function is activated and for some
Confirm options the app menu then closes.
If the app menu is opened again, the functions of
the most recently selected app are shown first.

104
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Related information Messages in the driver display and


• Application menu in the driver display the centre display
(p. 103) The driver display and centre display can show
• Managing messages in the driver display and messages to inform or assist the driver in the
the centre display (p. 107) event of different events.

Driver display

Message in the driver display3.


The driver display shows messages that are of
high priority for the driver.
The messages can be shown in different parts of
the driver display depending on what other infor-
mation is currently being displayed. After a while,
Message in the driver display2. or when the message has been acknowledged/
action taken if required, the message disappears
from the driver display. If a message needs to be
saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is
opened from the app view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons
for acknowledging the message or accepting a
request, for example.

2 With 8-inch driver display.


3 With 12-inch driver display. }}

105
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Service messages Message Specification Most messages are shown above the centre dis-
Shown below is a selection of important service play's status bar. After a while, or when any
messages and their meanings. Regular main- Time for regular service - required action related to the message has been
tenance contact a workshopB. taken, the message disappears from the status
Message Specification Shown when the service bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is posi-
Maintenance
date has passed. tioned in the top view in the centre display.
overdue
Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the
Message composition may vary and they can be
engine. Serious risk of Temporarily A function has been tem- shown together with graphics, symbols or a but-
damage - consult a work- offA porarily switched off and is ton for activating/deactivating a function linked
shopB. reset automatically while to the message.
driving or after starting
Turn off Stop and switch off the Pop-up messages
again.
engineA engine. Serious risk of In some cases, a message is shown in the form
damage - consult a work- A Part of message, shown together with information on where the
of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have
problem has arisen.
shopB. B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. higher priority than messages shown in the sta-
Service urgent tus bar and require acknowledgement/action
Contact a workshopB to Centre display before they disappear. Messages that need to be
Drive to work- check the car immediately.
saved are positioned in the top view in the centre
shopA
display.
Service Contact a workshopB to
Related information
requiredA check the car as soon as
possible. • Driver display (p. 88)
• Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Regular main- Time for regular service -
tenance contact a workshopB.
• Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 107)
Book time for Shown before the next
service date. • Managing messages saved from the driver
maintenance display and centre display (p. 108)
Regular main- Time for regular service -
tenance contact a workshopB. Message in the centre display.

Time for main- Shown at the next service The centre display shows messages that are of
date. lower priority for the driver.
tenance

106
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Managing messages in the driver For messages without buttons:


display and the centre display – Close the message by pressing on confirm
Messages in the driver display and centre dis- (2), or allow the message to close automati-
play are managed with the steering wheel's cally after a while.
right-hand keypad and in the centre display's > The message disappears from the driver
views. display.
Driver display If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the Car status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display. The message Car
message stored in Car Status application is
shown in the centre display in conjunction with
Message in the driver display5 and the steering wheel's this.
right-hand keypad.
Left/right
Centre display

Confirm
Some messages in the driver display contain one
or more buttons for acknowledging the message
or accepting a request, for example.
Message in the driver display4 and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad. Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
1. Navigate between the different buttons that
are available by tapping on left or right (1).
2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm
(2). Message in the centre display.
> The message disappears from the driver Some messages in the centre display have a but-
display. ton (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for

4 With 8-inch driver display.


5 With 12-inch driver display. }}

107
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to Managing messages saved from Reading a saved message
the message. the driver display and centre display To read a saved message immediately:
Managing a new message Whether saved from the driver display or the – Press the button to the right of the Car
For messages with buttons: centre display, messages are managed in the message stored in Car Status
centre display. application message in the centre display.
– Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically Messages saved from the driver display > The saved message is shown in the Car
after a while. status app.
> The message disappears from the status To read a saved message later:
bar.
1. Open the Car status app from the app view
For messages without buttons: in the centre display.
– Close the message by tapping on it, or allow > The app is opened in the bottom subview
the message to close automatically after a of the home view.
while. 2. Select the Messages tab in the app.
> The message disappears from the status > A list of saved messages is shown.
bar.
3. Press on the arrow to the right to maximise/
If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned minimise a message.
in the top view in the centre display.
Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app. > More information on the message is
Related information Messages that are shown in shown in the list and the image to the left
• Messages in the driver display and the centre the driver display and that need in the app shows information about the
display (p. 105) to be saved are added in the message graphically.
• Managing messages saved from the driver Car status app in the centre
display and centre display (p. 108) display. The message Car
message stored in Car
Status application is shown
in the centre display in conjunction with this.

108
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Managing a saved message Messages saved from the centre – Press the button to perform the action.
In maximised mode, some messages have two display Saved messages in the top view are deleted
buttons available to book service or read the automatically when the car is switched off.
owner's manual.
To book service for a saved message: Related information
• Messages in the driver display and the centre
– In maximised mode for the message, press display (p. 105)
Request appoint.Call to make
Appointment6 for help in booking service.
• Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 107)
> With Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app and
creates a request to book service and
repair work.
With Call to make Appointment: The
Saved messages and possible options in the top view.
phone app is initiated and calls a service
centre to book service and repair work. Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top view
To read the owner's manual for a saved mes-
of the centre display.
sage:
Reading a saved message
– In maximised mode for the message, press
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
Owner's manual to read about the mes-
sage in the owner's manual. > A list of saved messages is shown. Mes-
sages with an arrow to the right can be
> The owner's manual opens in the centre
maximised.
display and shows information linked to
the message. 2. Press on the arrow to maximise/minimise
the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automat-
ically each time the engine is started. Managing a saved message
Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/
deactivating a function linked to the message.

6 Depending on market.

109
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Head-up display* NOTE


The head-up display supplements the car's
The driver's ability to see the information in
driver display and projects information from the
the head-up display is impaired by the follow-
driver display onto the windscreen. The projec-
ing:
ted image can only be seen from the driver posi-
tion. • use of polarising sunglasses
• a driving position which means that the
driver is not sitting centred in the seat
• objects on the display unit's cover glass
• unfavourable light conditions.

Examples of what can be shown in the display.


IMPORTANT
Speed
The display unit from which the information is
projected is located in the instrument panel. Cruise control
To avoid damage to the display unit's cover
glass - do not store any objects on the cover Navigation
glass and make sure that no objects fall down Road signs
Incoming phone calls. onto it.
The head-up display shows warnings and infor- A number of symbols can be shown temporarily
mation relating to speed, cruise control functions, in the head-up display, e.g.:
navigation, etc. in the driver's field of vision. Road If the warning symbol illuminates - read
sign information and incoming phone calls are the warning message in the driver dis-
also shown in the head-up display. play.

If the information symbol illuminates -


read the message in the driver display.

110 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

NOTE Activating/deactivating the head-up The setting can be saved as a personal setting in
display the driver profile.
Certain visual defects may cause headaches
Press the Head-up display
and a feeling of stress during the use of the
button in the centre display
head-up display.
function view.

City Safety in the head-up display

NOTE
When City Safety* is activated, the informa- NOTE
tion in the head-up display is replaced by a Activation/deactivation and adjustment of the
graphic for City Safety. This graphic is illumi- head-up-display can only be performed when
nated even if the head-up display is switched it shows a projected image. The car's engine
off. must be running.

Settings for head-up display


Select the option and adjust the settings for the
head-up display's projection onto the windscreen.
Selecting display options
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options.
3. Select which functions should be shown:
• Show Navigation
The graphic for City Safety flashes in order to catch the
driver's attention.
• Show Road Sign Information
• Show Driver Support
• Show Phone.
}}

* Option/accessory. 111
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Adjusting brightness and vertical position Raising the position

Lowering the position

Confirm
The brightness of the graphics is automatically
adapted to their background light conditions. The
brightness is also affected by the adjustment of
1. Press the Head-up display adjustments the brightness in the car's other displays.
button in the centre display function view.
The height position can be stored in the memory
2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of
function of the power* front seat.
the projected image in the driver's field of
vision using the steering wheel's right-hand Calibrate the horizontal position
Rotate anticlockwise
keypad. The head-up display's horizontal position may
need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display Rotate clockwise
unit is replaced. Calibration means that the pro-
jected image is rotated clockwise or anticlock- Confirm
wise.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top Cleaning
view. Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a clean
and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary, lightly mois-
2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up ten the microfibre cloth.
Display Options Head-Up Display Never use strong stain removers. A special clean-
Calibration. ing agent available from Volvo dealers can be
3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with used for more difficult cleaning.
the steering wheel's right keypad.
When replacing the windscreen
Reducing the brightness Cars with head-up display are equipped with a
Increasing the brightness special type of windscreen that meets the
requirements for displaying the projected image.

112 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

When replacing the windscreen - contact an Voice recognition8


authorised workshop7. The correct version of the The voice recognition system allows the driver to
windscreen must be fitted in order that the head- use voice recognition to control certain functions
up display's graphics shall be displayed correctly. of the media player, Bluetooth-connected phone,
the climate system and Volvo's navigation sys-
Related information
tem*.
• Function view with buttons for car functions
(p. 47) Voice commands offer convenience and assist
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165) the driver to not be distracted so that he or she
can concentrate on driving, the road and the traf-
• Steering wheel (p. 129)
fic situation.
• Using the memory function in the power
front seat* (p. 121)
WARNING Voice control system microphone
• Driver display (p. 88)
The driver always holds overall responsibility Voice control is done in dialogue form with the
for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and user saying commands and receiving verbal
complying with all applicable rules of the road. responses from the system. The voice recognition
system uses the same microphone as the
Bluetooth handsfree system and the voice recog-
nition system's replies come via the car's speak-
ers. In some cases, a text message is also shown
in the driver display. Functions are controlled
from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Set-
tings are made via the centre display.
System updating
The voice recognition system is continuously
improved. Download updates for optimal perform-
ance, see support.volvocars.com.

7 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.


8 Applies to certain markets. }}

* Option/accessory. 113
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Related information Using voice recognition9 Example of voice recognition control


• Using voice recognition (p. 114) Basic instructions for using voice recognition Press , say “Call [Forename] [Surname]
• Voice recognition control of the phone control. [number category]" - calls the selected contact
(p. 116) from the phone book if the contact has more
Depress the steering wheel than one phone number (e.g. home, mobile,
• Voice recognition control of radio and media button for voice recognition work), e.g.:
(p. 116)
to activate the system and
• Voice recognition control of climate control initiate a dialogue using voice Press , say "Call Robin Smith Mobile".
(p. 117) commands.
Commands/phrases
• Voice recognition and map navigation The following commands are always available for
(p. 118) Remember the following during communication: use:
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
• For a command - speak after the tone in a • "Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction
normal voice at normal speed. in the ongoing dialogue.
• Do not speak while the system is replying • "Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.
(the system cannot understand commands
• "Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system
during this time). replies with the commands available in the
• Avoid background noise in the passenger current situation, a prompt or an example.
compartment by having the doors, windows Commands for specific functions are described in
and panoramic roof* closed. the corresponding sections, e.g. Voice recogni-
Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows: tion control of the phone.
• by saying "Cancel".
• with a long press on the voice recognition
button on the steering wheel .
To speed up communication and skip the
prompts from the system, press the steering
wheel button for voice recognition when the
system voice is speaking and say the next com-
mand.

9 Applies to certain markets.

114 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Digits Settings for voice recognition10 Related information


The number commands are stated differently Several settings for the voice recognition system • Voice recognition (p. 113)
depending on the function to be controlled: can be made. • Using voice recognition (p. 114)
• Phone numbers and postcodes must be
1. Press Settings in top view. • Voice recognition control of the phone
spoken individually, number by number, e.g. (p. 116)
zero three one two two four four three 2. Continue to System Voice Control and
(03122443).
• Voice recognition control of radio and media
select settings. (p. 116)
• House numbers can be spoken individually • Repeat Voice Command • Voice recognition control of climate control
or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22).
For English and Dutch, several groups can • Gender (p. 117)
be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twenty- • Speech Rate • Voice recognition and map navigation
two (22 22). For English, double or triple can (p. 118)
Audio settings
be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can
1. Press Settings in top view.
be given within the range 0-2300.
2.
• Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight Continue to Sound System Volumes
point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point Voice Control and select settings.
two or hundred four point two (104.2). Change language
Voice recognition is not possible for all lan-
Related information
guages. Languages available for voice recogni-
• Voice recognition (p. 113)
tion are marked with an icon in the language list -
• Voice recognition control of the phone .
(p. 116)
Changing the language also affects menu, mes-
• Voice recognition control of radio and media
sage and help texts.
(p. 116)
1. Press Settings in top view.
• Voice recognition control of climate control
(p. 117) 2. Continue to System System Language
• Voice recognition and map navigation and select language.
(p. 118)
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)

10 Applies to certain markets.

115
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Voice recognition control of the this function to work, the car must be con- Voice recognition control of radio
phone11 nected to the Internet. and media13
Call a contact, have messages read aloud or Related information Command for voice recognition control of radio
dictate brief messages with voice control com- and media player.
• Voice recognition (p. 113)
mands to a Bluetooth connected telephone.
• Using voice recognition (p. 114) Tap on and say one of the following com-
To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice • Settings for voice recognition (p. 115) mands:
recognition command must include contact infor-
mation that is entered in the phone book. If a • Connecting the car (p. 484) • "Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone radio and shows examples of commands.
numbers then the number category can also be • "Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin selected artist.
Smith Mobile". • "Play [song title]" - plays back the selected
Tap on and say one of the following com- song.
mands: • "Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected
• "Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact
album.
from the phone book.
• "Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
• "Play [TV channel name]" - starts the
selected TV channel.
number.
• "Recent calls" - displays the call list.
• "Play [radio station]" - starts playing back
the selected radio channel.
• "Read message" - message is read out. If
• "Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected
there are several messages - select which
radio frequency in the current frequency
message should be read out.
band. If no radio source is active, the FM
• "Message to [contact]" users are reques- band is started by default.
ted to say a brief message. The message is
then repeated aloud and the user can
• "Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" -
starts the selected radio frequency in the
choose to send12 or revise the message. For selected frequency band.

11 Applies to certain markets.


12 Only certain cars can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
13 Applies to certain markets.

116
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

• "Radio" - starts FM radio. Voice recognition control of climate • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" -
• "Radio FM" - starts FM radio. control14 activates/deactivates the air conditioning.

• "Radio AM" - starts AM radio. Voice recognition commands for the climate • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" -
control system to e.g. change temperature, acti- activates/deactivates the air circulation.
• "DAB " - starts DAB radio.
vate a heated seat* or change fan level. • "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster"
• "TV" - starts playback from TV*. - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows
Press and say one of the following com-
• "CD" - starts playback from CD*. and door mirrors.
mands:
• "USB" - starts playback from USB. • "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
• "Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
• "iPod" - starts playback from iPod. control and shows examples of commands. max defroster.
• "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Blue-
• "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
tooth-connected media source. • "Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
the desired temperature. electric defroster" - activates/deactivates
• "Similar music" — plays back music similar
• "Raise temperature"/"Lower the heated windscreen*.
to the music currently playing back from USB
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
devices.
setting one step. defroster" - activates/deactivates the
Related information • "Sync temperature" - synchronises the heated rear window and door mirrors.
• Voice recognition (p. 113) temperature for all climate zones in the car • "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
• Using voice recognition (p. 114) with the temperature set for the driver's side. steering wheel heat off" - activates/deac-
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 115) • "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the tivates the heated steering wheel*.
desired air flow.
• "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
• "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
the desired air flow. setting for the heated steering wheel* one
• "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes step.
the air flow to Max/Off. • "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
• "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" - - activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
raises/lowers the fan level one step. • "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -
• "Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate raises/lowers the setting for the heated
regulation. seat* one step.

14 Applies to certain markets. }}

* Option/accessory. 117
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| • "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat Voice recognition and map • "Go to [Post code]" - Specifies a post
ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat navigation15 code as a destination. Example "Drive to 1 2
ventilation*. Several navigation system functions can be acti- 3 4 5".
• "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat vated with voice commands. • "Go to [contact]" - Specifies an address
ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for from the phone book as a destination. Exam-
the ventilated seat* one step. Tap on and say one of the following com- ple "Drive to Robyn Smith".
mands:
Related information • "Search [POI category]" - Searches for
• Voice recognition (p. 113) • “Navigation” - Initiates a navigation dialogue adjacent points of interest (POI) within a cer-
and shows examples of commands. tain category (e.g. restaurants)16. To have the
• Using voice recognition (p. 114)
• "Take me home" - Guidance is given to the list sorted along the route - say "Along the
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 115) Home position. route" when the results list is shown.
• Climate control (p. 176) • "Go to [City]" - Specifies a city as a desti- • "Search [POI category] in [City]" -
nation. Example "Drive to London". Searches for points of interest (POI) within a
certain category and city. The results list is
• "Go to [Address]" - Specifies an address sorted according to the city's centre point.
as a destination. An address must contain Example "Search for restaurant in London".
city and street. Example "Drive to 5 King
Street". • "Search [POI name]". Example "Search
Hyde Park".
• "Add intersection" - Starts a dialogue
where two streets must be specified. The • "Change country/Change state17, 18" -
intersection point of the specified streets Changes the search area for navigation.
then becomes the destination. • "Show favourites" - Shows favourited posi-
tions in the driver display.
• "Clear itinerary" - Erases all the stored
intermediate destinations and final destina-
tion in an itinerary.

15 Applies to certain markets.


16 The user has the option of calling the POI or specifying it as a destination.
17 In European countries, “Country” is used instead of “State”.
18 For Brazil and India, the search area is changed via the centre display.

118 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

• "Repeat voice guidance" - Repeats the Manual front seat Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
last spoken guidance. The car's front seats have different setting the control up/down.
• "Turn off voice guidance" - Switches off options for optimum seating comfort. Change the backrest rake by turning the
voice guidance. control knob.
• "Turn on voice guidance" - Starts the
switched-off voice guidance. WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
Related information setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
• Voice recognition (p. 113) the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
• Using voice recognition (p. 114) personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
• Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
Related information
• Power front seat* (p. 120)
• Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122)
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush- • Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
ion* by pumping up/down. (p. 197)
Change the length* of the seat cushion by • Seatbelt (p. 58)
pulling the lever up and moving the seat
cushion forward/backward by hand.
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting
the handle and adjusting the distance to the
steering wheel and pedals. Check that the
seat is locked after the position has been
adjusted.
Change the lumbar support* by pressing the
button upward/downward/forward/back.

* Option/accessory. 119
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Power front seat* Adjusting the power front seat* Related information
The car's front seats have different setting Set to desired sitting position using the control • Power front seat* (p. 120)
options for optimum seating comfort. The power on the front seat's seating section. • Using the memory function in the power
seat can be moved forward/backward and up/ front seat* (p. 121)
down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be
raised/lowered and the backrest rake can be • Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122)
changed. The lumbar support can be adjusted • Seatbelt (p. 58)
upward/downward/forward/backward.

The power seats have overload protection which


is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this
happens, remove the object and then operate the
seat again.
The seat can be adjusted for a period of time
after unlocking the door without the engine run-
ning. Seat adjustment can always be performed
when the engine is running. Adjustment can also Change the lumbar support by pressing the
be performed for a period of time after the button upward/downward/forward/back.
engine has been switched off. Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by
Related information adjusting the control up/down.
• Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122) Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
the control up/down.
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
Move the seat forward/backward by adjust-
• Using the memory function in the power
ing the control forward/backward.
front seat* (p. 121)
Change the backrest rake by adjusting the
• Manual front seat (p. 119)
control forward/backward.
• Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
(p. 197) can be made at a time.
The backrests of the front seats cannot be low-
ered fully forward.

120 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using the memory function in the 3. Within three seconds, depress the 1 or 2 WARNING
power front seat* button.
The memory function stores settings for the seat, > When the position has been stored in the • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted
with the ignition off, children should never
door mirrors, and head-up display*. selected memory button an acoustic sig-
be left unattended in the vehicle.
nal sounds and the light indicator in the M
It is possible to store two different settings with button extinguishes. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
the memory function. The memory function key- at any time by pressing any button on the
pad is located either on one front door or both*. If none of the memory buttons is depressed power seat control panel.
within three seconds then the M button extin-
guishes and no storing takes place. • Do not adjust the seat while driving.

The seat must be adjusted again before a new • Make sure there is nothing under the
seats when they are being adjusted.
memory can be set.

Using a stored setting Related information


A stored setting can be used with the front door • Power front seat* (p. 120)
either open or closed:
• Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
Open front door
– Depress one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
with a short press. Seat, door mirrors and
head-up display move and then stop at the
positions stored in the selected memory but-
Button M for storing settings.
ton.
Memory button Closed front door
– Hold one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
Memory button depressed until seat, door mirrors and head-
up display stop in the positions that are
Store setting stored in the selected memory button.
1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display
to the desired position. If the memory button is released, the movement
of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will
2. Push the M button and release. The light be stopped.
indicator in the button illuminates.

* Option/accessory. 121
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Multi-functional front seat* the screen. When it is possible to show setting Adjusting functions in the multi-
Enhance the seating comfort using the multi- options for both the front seats, the driver's set- functional front seat*
function control. ting options are shown in the upper half and the Both the multi-function control on the seat and
passenger's in the lower half. the centre display can be used in order to
To stop showing the seat settings view in the change the settings. The range of settings is
centre display, press the home button, which is shown in the centre display*.
located under the centre display.

Related information
• Power front seat* (p. 120)
• Adjusting functions in the multi-functional
front seat* (p. 122)
• Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 197)

Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's


seating section.
The multi-function control can, in some variants,
be used to adjust the lumbar support*, side sup- Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
port*, cushion length and massage settings*. Set-
tings made with the multi-function control are To activate the multi-function control, turn the
shown in the centre display*. Certain function control upwards/downward.
selections can also be made directly in the centre
display. Adjusting massage settings* in the
front seat
Centre display The front seat has massage in the backrest. The
The driver and the passenger seat settings that massage is performed by air cushions that can
are made with the multi-function control are massage with different settings.
shown in the centre display. If the settings for
only one of the front seats are shown in the cen-
tre display, the settings are positioned centred in

122 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning Restarting massage Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
the control upward/downward. The seat set- The massage function is deactivated automati- front seat
tings view will be shown on the centre dis- cally after 20 minutes. The function is reactivated The lumbar support can be adjusted upward/
play. manually. downward/forward/backward.
2. Select Massage in the seat settings view. – Tap on Restart, which is shown in the centre To adjust the lumbar support:
3. To choose between the different massage display, to restart the selected massage pro-
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
functions, select either directly in the touch gram.
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
screen or by moving the cursor up/down > The massage program restarts. If no tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
using the multi-function control's upper/ action is taken, the message remains play.
lower button. Change the setting in the shown in the top view.
selected function by selecting directly in the 2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view.
It is not possible to use the massage function
touch screen or by pressing the arrows, or by when the engine is switched off. • Press the seat button up/down to move
using the multi-function control's front/rear the lumbar support up/down.
button. Adjusting side support* in the front seat
• Press the front seat button in order to
Settings for massage
backrests increase the lumbar support.
The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to pro-
The following setting options are available for • Press the rear seat button in order to
vide side support.
massage: decrease the lumbar support.
To adjust the side support:
• On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch Extending the seat cushion in the front
on/off the massage function. 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set- seat
• Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the
programs. Select between Swell, Tread, tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play. multi-function control on the seat.
Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.
2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
• Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and the control upward/downward. The seat set-
High. view.
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
• Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and • Press the front seat button in order to play.
Fast. increase the side support.
• Press the rear seat button in order to
reduce the side support.

}}

* Option/accessory. 123
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| 2. Select Cushion extension in the seat set- Adjusting the passenger seat from
tings view. the driver's seat*
• Press the front seat button in order to The front passenger seat can be adjusted from
extend the seat cushion. the driver's seat.
• Press the rear seat button in order to Activating the function
retract the seat cushion. The function can be activated in two ways via the
centre display:
Related information
• Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122) Via the function view
• Managing messages saved from the driver Press the Adjust passenger
display and centre display (p. 108) seat button to activate.

Move the passenger seat forward/backward


by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the passenger seat's backrest rake
Via settings by adjusting the control forward/backward.
1. Press Settings in the top view. Related information
2. Press My Car Seats. • Power front seat* (p. 120)

3. Select Adjust Passenger Seat From • Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
Driver Position to activate. • Seatbelt (p. 58)

Adjust passenger seat


From activation of the function, the driver must
adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If
no adjustment is made within this time the func-
tion is deactivated.
The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the
controls on the driver's seat:

124 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the head restraints in the Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
rear seat outer head restraints*
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according
to the height of the passenger. Fold down the
outer seat head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.

Adjusting the head restraint, centre


seat

To lower the head restraint, the button (see illus-


tration) must be depressed while the restraint is
carefully moved down. The outer head restraints can be lowered in two
ways via the centre display:
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in its Via the function view
lowest position when the centre seat is not Press the Headrest fold but-
used. When the centre seat is used, the head ton to activate/deactivate low-
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the ering.
height of the passenger so that it covers the
The centre seat's head restraint must be
whole of the back of the head if possible.
adjusted according to the passenger's height so
that, if possible, the whole of the back of the
head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.

}}

* Option/accessory. 125
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Via settings Lowering the backrests in the rear


The car's electrical system must be in the ignition seat
position II. The rear seat's backrest is divided into two
1. Press Settings in the top view. parts. The two parts can be lowered forward
individually.
2. Press My Car Seats.
3. Select Fold Headrest On Second Row WARNING
Seats to lower the rear outer head • Adjust the seat and fix it before driving
restraints. away. Take care when adjusting the seat.
Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can
WARNING lead to trapping injuries.
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there • When loading long objects, they must
are passengers in any of the outer rear seats. always be strapped in securely to avoid
injury and damage during sudden braking.
Move the head restraint back manually until a • Always switch off the engine and apply
click is heard. the parking brake when loading and
unloading the car.
WARNING • Set the gear selector in P to prevent it
The head restraint must be in locked position from being moved by mistake.
after being folded up.
IMPORTANT
Manual lowering of the outer head
There must be no objects on the rear seat
restraints, rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The
For cars with electric rear seat folding*, the outer Related information seat belts must not be connected either. Oth-
head restraints are folded manually with the con-
• Lowering the backrests in the rear seat erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear
trol on the upper side of the seat; see figure . (p. 126) seat upholstery.
For cars without electric folding, fold down the
outer head restraints with the inner control on the
upper side of the seat; see figure .

126 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

IMPORTANT cargo area. The backrests can also be lowered To lower the backrest manually:
manually.
The armrest* for the centre seat must be
raised before lowering the seat.
WARNING
If the car has private locking, the tailgate must Pay attention that people are not at risk of
be closed before lowering the seat. being trapped during the automatic folding of
the rear seat. Since this takes place automati-
cally on the press of a button, no one must be
NOTE on or too close to the rear seat.
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
wards, and/or the backrests adjusted To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be stationary and the tailgate open.
be fully folded forward.
For electronically controlled folding of backrests:
1. Ensure that there are no occupants or 1. Lower the centre head restraint manually .
Lowering the backrest
objects in the rear seat.
Car with electronic folding 2. Pull the handles located in the car's left and
2. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man- right-hand rear seat backrests forward .
ually.
3. The backrest disengages from the lock and
3. Hold the button for folding depressed. The is automatically lowered to the horizontal
buttons are marked L and R for left and position.
right-hand backrest sections respectively.
4. The backrests are lowered automatically to
horizontal position. The head restraints are
also lowered automatically.

If the car is equipped with electronic folding of


the rear seat* there are buttons located in the

}}

* Option/accessory. 127
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Car without electronic folding If the right-hand section is being lowered - WARNING
The rear seat consists of two parts: release and adjust the centre backrest head
restraint. Check that the backrests and head restraints
• The right-hand seat and centre seat are in the rear seat are locked properly after
folded as one unit. Pull up the backrest's locking handle being folded up.
• The left-hand seat is folded separately. while folding the backrest forward at the The head restraints of the outer seats must
same time. The locking handle for the head always be raised when there are passengers
restraints is pulled up automatically when the on any of the rear seats.
backrest is folded. A red indicator on the lock
catch shows that the backrest is no Raising the backrest
longer locked in place. Raising the backrest to upright position is carried
out manually:
NOTE 1. Move the backrest up/down manually.
When the backrests have been lowered, the 2. Press the backrest until the catch engages.
head restraints may need to be moved for-
ward slightly so as not to make contact with 3. The head restraint is raised manually.
the seat cushion. 4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head
restraint.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
Related information
• Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat
WARNING (p. 125)
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it is
still showing then the backrest is not locked
in place.

128
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Steering wheel Horn • Head-up display* (p. 110)


The steering wheel houses the horn and con- • Using the application menu in the driver dis-
trols for e.g. the driver support systems and play (p. 104)
voice recognition.
• Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 107)
• Phone (p. 477)

The horn is located in the centre of the steering


wheel.

Related information
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
• Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 130)
Controls for driver support systems19.
• Activating/deactivating heating of steering
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in wheel* (p. 199)
an automatic gearbox. • Speed limiter* (p. 275)
Controls for voice recognition, head-up dis- • Cruise control (p. 282)
play settings, and menu, message and phone
handling.
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
• Distance Warning* (p. 287)
• Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
• Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
(p. 413)
• Voice recognition (p. 113)

19 Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*.

* Option/accessory. 129
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the steering wheel regulated according to the car's speed in order to Without knee airbag
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.
positions. With knee airbag

Adjusting the steering wheel.


1. Pull the lever backwards to release the steer-
Adjusting the steering wheel. ing wheel.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for
depth. 1. Push the lever forwards to release the steer- 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
Steering wheel adjustment can be made in differ- ing wheel. suits you.
ent ways depending on whether or not the car is 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that 3. Push the lever forwards to secure the steer-
equipped with knee airbag20. suits you. ing wheel. If the lever is stiff, press the steer-
ing wheel lightly at the same time as you
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel
WARNING move the lever back.
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before wheel lightly at the same time as you move Related information
driving away. The steering wheel must never the lever back.
be adjusted while driving. • Steering wheel (p. 129)
• Speed-dependent steering force (p. 270)
With speed related power steering the level of
steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is

20 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.

130
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Lighting control Position Specification Position Specification


The different lighting controls are used to control
both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand Daytime running lights. Daytime running lights and position
stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior lamps.
Main beam flash can be used.
lighting. Use the thumbwheel in the instrument Dipped beam and position lamps in
panel to adjust headlamp levelling21 and the Daytime running lights and position weak daylight or darkness, or when
lamps.
brightness of the interior lighting. the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
Position lamps when the car is lamp are activated.
Exterior lighting parkedA. The Active main beam function can
Main beam flash can be used. be activated.

Dipped beam and position lamps. Main beam can be activated when
dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Main beam flash can be used.
Active main beam on/off.

A Also at stationary when the car is running, provided that the


rotating ring is moved to this position from another position.

Volvo recommends that mode is used


when the vehicle is driven.
Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.
When the car's electrical system is in ignition WARNING
position II or when the car is running, the follow- The car's audio system is not able to deter-
ing functions are available in the rotating ring's mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently
different positions. strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit-
able for the traffic situation and in accordance
with applicable traffic regulations.

21 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps. }}

* Option/accessory. 131
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Thumbwheel in the instrument panel height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is Headlamp levelling
heavily laden. Headlamp levelling23 is adjusted using one of
For different load cases and settings, see the the thumbwheels in the instrument panel.
section "Headlamp levelling".
1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's
Related information electrical system in ignition position I.
• Passenger compartment lighting (p. 141) 2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower
• Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 135) beam alignment.
• Ignition positions (p. 403) The position in which the thumbwheel should be
• Position lamps (p. 133) set for a number of load cases is shown below.
• Headlamp levelling (p. 132)

Thumbwheel for adjusting interior brightness

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

A car with LED22 headlamps* has automatic


headlamp levelling and therefore does not have
the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.
Adjusting the interior brightness
The lamps inside the car come on differently
depending on the ignition position used.
Examples of thumbwheel position.
The thumbwheel adjusts the brightness of display
lighting, control lighting, ambient light and ambi- Thumbwheel in position 0
ence light*.
Thumbwheel in position 1
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle
oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the

22 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

132 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Load case Thumb- Position lamps running lights are switched on. The driver should
wheel The position lamps are switched on with the turn to a position other than .
position rotating ring on the stalk switch.
Related information
Only driver. 0 • Lighting control (p. 131)

Driver and passenger in the front 0 • Ignition positions (p. 403)


passenger seat.
Driver and passenger in the front 1
passenger seat.
Three passengers in the rear
seat.
Driver and passenger in the front 1
passenger seat.
Three passengers in the rear Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
seat.
Turn the rotating ring to the position - the
220 kg load in the cargo area.
position lamps are switched on (number plate
Driver and maximum load in the 2 lighting is switched on at the same time).
cargo area. If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside,
the rear position lamps come on (if not already
Related information switched on) to warn road users approaching
• Lighting control (p. 131) from behind. This takes place irrespective of the
position of the rotating ring or the ignition posi-
tion of the car's electrical system.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at max.
10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime

23 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.

133
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Daytime running lights The car automatically changes lighting from day- Dipped beam
The car has sensors that detect the light condi- time running light to dipped beam in weak day- When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring
tions in the surroundings. The daytime running light or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also
in the position, dipped beam is activated
lights are switched on when the rotating ring on takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
automatically in weak daylight or darkness.
lamp are activated.
the stalk switch is in position , or
as well as when the car's electrical system At stationary when the car is running, the posi-
is in ignition position II or when the car is run- tion lamps are switched on instead of other light-
ning. In position , the headlamps change ing, if the rotating ring is moved to the position
automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or for position lamps, , from another position.
darkness.
WARNING
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with the correct beam Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
pattern for the traffic situation and in accord-
ance with applicable traffic regulations. With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the
position, dipped beam is activated automatically
Related information in weak daylight or darkness, when the car's
electrical system is in ignition position II or when
• Lighting control (p. 131)
the car is running.
• Dipped beam (p. 134)
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in
• Ignition positions (p. 403)
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position. position, dipped beam is also activated automati-
cally if:
If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the
position, the daytime running lights (DRL24) are
• the front fog lamps* are activated
switched on when the car is driven in daylight. • the rear fog lamp is activated
• the front and rear fog lamps are activated

24 Daytime Running Lights

134 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Dipped beam is always switched on when the Activating/deactivating main beam Main beam
rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position Main beam is activated with the stalk switch. Main beam can be activated when the steering
when the car's electrical system is in igni- wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
Active main beam is activated with the rotating
tion position II or when the car is running. 25 or . Activate main beam by moving
ring on the stalk switch.
Tunnel detection the stalk switch forwards. Deactivate by moving
the stalk switch backwards.
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
and switches from daytime running lights to When main beam has been activated the
dipped beam. symbol illuminates in the driver display.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk
Active main beam
switch must be in mode for tunnel detec- Active main beam is a function which uses a
tion to work. camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen
to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming
Related information
traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and
• Daytime running lights (p. 134)
then switches from main beam to dipped beam.
• Lighting control (p. 131) The function can also take streetlights into
• Ignition positions (p. 403) account.
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Main beam is reactivated when the camera sen-
Position for main beam flash sor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or
Position for main beam vehicles ahead.
Car with halogen headlamps
Main beam flash The lighting returns to main beam about a sec-
Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main ond after the camera sensor no longer detects
beam flash position. Main beam comes on until the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
the stalk switch is released. rear lights from vehicles in front.

25 When dipped beam is activated. }}

135
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Car with LED26 headlamps* The lighting returns to full main beam about a When main beam is activated, the symbol shines
If the active main beam has the on/off functional- second after the camera sensor no longer blue. This also applies for LED headlamps if the
ity27 then the lighting returns to main beam about detects the headlamp beams from oncoming main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. if the light
a second after the camera sensor no longer traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. beam shines with slightly more than dipped
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming Activate/deactivate beam.
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. The function can start while driving in the dark
If the active main beam has adaptive functional- when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx.
12 mph) or higher.
ity27 then, unlike what happens during conven-
tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu- Activate/deactivate active main beam by turning
minate with main beam on both sides of oncom- the stalk switch's rotating ring to position
ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the and release. If active main beam is deactivated
light beam that points directly to the vehicle is while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately
dimmed. reset to dipped beam.

Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards


oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both When active main beam is activated, the symbol
sides of the vehicle. illuminates with a white glow in the driver
display.

26 LED (Light Emitting Diode)


27 Depending on the car's equipment level.

136 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Manual operation the message goes out and the symbol illu- IMPORTANT
minates.
Examples of when manual switching between
NOTE main and dipped beam may be required:
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the WARNING
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and Active main beam is an aid for using the opti-
• In heavy rain or dense fog
dirt. mum beam pattern when conditions are • In freezing rain
favourable. • In snow flurries or slush
Do not stick or attach anything to the wind-
screen in front of the camera sensor as this The driver always bears responsibility for man- • In moonlight
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or ually switching between main and dipped
beam when traffic situations or weather con- • When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
more of the systems dependent on the cam- ditions so require.
era to stop working. • When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
• If there are pedestrians on or beside the
road
If this symbol is shown in the driver dis-
play, together with the message Active • If there are highly reflective objects such
High Beam Temporarily as signs in the vicinity of the road
unavailable, then switching between • When the lighting from oncoming traffic
main and dipped beam must be performed man- is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
ually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still
• When there is traffic on connecting roads
be in the position. The symbol extin-
guishes when these message are shown. • On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
• In sharp bends.
The same applies if this symbol is
shown together with the message
Windscreen sensor Sensor Read more about the camera sensor's limitations
blocked, see Owner's manual. in the section "Limitations for City Safety".

Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable Related information


e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. • Lighting control (p. 131)
When active main beam becomes available again, • Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,

137
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Active bending lights* The function is only active in weak daylight or Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide darkness and only when the car is moving and The front fog lamps have cornering lights that
maximum illumination in bends and junctions. dipped beam is switched on. shine diagonally to the side.
Cars with LED28 headlamps* can have active Deactivating/activating the function
bending lights, depending on the car's equip- The function is in activated mode when the car is
ment level. delivered from the factory and can be deacti-
vated/activated via the centre display in two
ways:
Via the function view
Press the Active Bending
Lights button.

Button for front fog lamps.


Via settings
1. Press Settings in the top view. The front fog lamps can only be switched on
when ignition position II is active or the car is
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting running and the rotating ring on the stalk switch
activated (right) respectively. Exterior Lights. is in position , or .
Active bending lights follow steering wheel move- 3. Deselect/select Active Bending Lights. Press the on/off button. The symbol in the
ments to provide maximum illumination in bends
driver display illuminates when the front fog
and junctions and can thereby increase safety. Related information
lamps are switched on.
The function is activated automatically when the • Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
The front fog lamps switch off automatically when
car is started. In the event of a fault in the func- • Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 138)
the start knob it turned clockwise to switch off
tion, the symbol illuminates in the driver the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is set to
display at the same time as the driver display
the position.
shows an explanatory text.

28 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

138 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

NOTE Rear fog lamp Press the on/off button. The symbol in the
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary
the normal rear lights and should only be used in is switched on.
from country to country.
reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
dust so that other road users have an early warn- when:
Cornering lights ing of a vehicle ahead.
The front fog lamps include the cornering lights • the start knob is turned clockwise to switch
function, which temporarily illuminates the area off the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is
diagonally in front of the car in the direction the set to the position
steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in
the direction shown by the direction indicators.
• the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
The function is activated in weak daylight or dark- off.
ness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
the or position and the speed of the NOTE
car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx.
20 mph). Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
from country to country.
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
reversing. Button for rear fog lamp. Related information
The rear fog lamp consists of a lamp on the left-
• Lighting control (p. 131)
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be deactivated/acti- hand side on a left-hand drive car, or on the right- • Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 138)
vated via the centre display. hand side on a right-hand drive car. • Ignition positions (p. 403)
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when:
Related information
• Lighting control (p. 131) • ignition position II is active or the car is run-
ning and the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
• Rear fog lamp (p. 139)
position or
• Active bending lights* (p. 138)
• the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
• Ignition positions (p. 403)
and the front fog lamps are switched
on.

* Option/accessory. 139
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Brake lights Hazard warning flashers NOTE


The brake light automatically comes on during Hazard warning flashers warn other road users
Regulations for the use of hazard warning
braking. by means of all the car's direction indicators
flashers may vary between countries.
being activated simultaneously. The function can
The brake light is switched on when the brake be used to warn in the event of traffic hazards.
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on Related information
when one of driver support systems Adaptive • Using direction indicators (p. 141)
cruise control*, City Safety or Rear Collision
Warning brakes the car. • Emergency brake lights (p. 427)

Related information
• Emergency brake lights (p. 427)
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
• City Safety (p. 336)
• Rear Collision Warning (p. 349)

Button for hazard warning flashers.


Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers.
The hazard warning flashers are automatically
activated when the car brakes so powerfully that
the emergency brake lights are activated and the
speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to
flash after the emergency brake lights have stop-
ped flashing and are then deactivated automati-
cally when the car drives away again or are deac-
tivated if the button is depressed.

140 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using direction indicators NOTE Passenger compartment lighting


The car's direction indicators are operated with The passenger compartment lighting is acti-
the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator • This automatic flashing sequence can be
vated/deactivated with the buttons in the over-
stopped by moving the stalk switch
lamps flash three times or continuously, depend- head controls above the front seats and the rear
immediately in the opposite direction.
ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is seat/rear seats*.
moved. • If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
than normal - see the message in the switched on and off manually within 7 minutes
driver display. from when:
• the car has been switched off and its electri-
Continuous flash sequence cal system is in ignition position 0
Move the stalk switch up or down to its end • the car has been unlocked but it has not
position. been started.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the Front lighting
steering wheel movement.

Related information
Direction indicators.
• Lighting control (p. 131)
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 140)
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
position and release. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times. The function can be
activated/deactivated via the centre display.

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and


passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side

Passenger compartment lighting


}}

* Option/accessory. 141
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Auto function for passenger compartment • remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side
lighting doors is open.
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Rear lighting
Front reading lamps The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
The reading lamps on the right and left-hand which is also used as passenger compartment
sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing lighting.
the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is The reading lamps are located in the interior roof.
adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
switched on or off with a short press on the but-
ton in the roof console. Reading lamp above the rear seat in cars with panorama
roof*.
Auto function for passenger compartment
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
lighting
briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Bright-
The automatic function is activated by a short
ness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
press on the AUTO button in the roof console.
The light indicator in the button illuminates when Glovebox lighting
the automatic function is activated. Press the Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec-
AUTO button to switch the passenger compart- tively when the lid is opened or closed.
ment lighting on and off in accordance with the Reading lamps above the rear seat29.
following. Vanity mirror lighting*
The lighting for the vanity mirror in the sun visor
Passenger compartment lighting:
is switched on and off respectively when the
• illuminates when the car is unlocked and cover is opened or closed.
when it is switched off
Ground lighting*
• extinguishes when the car is started and
when it is locked The ground lighting is switched on and off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
• comes on and goes off, respectively, when a
side door is opened or closed

29 In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof.

142 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Lighting in the cargo area – Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity. 3. Choose between By Temperature and By
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and Colour in order to change the brightness
off respectively when the tailgate is opened or Ambience lights* and colour of the light.
closed. The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that
make it possible to change the colour of the light. With the By Temperature option, the
Ambient light These lights are switched on when the car is run- brightness of the light changes according to
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre ning. the set passenger compartment temperature.
display. The ambience lights can be changed via the cen- With the By Colour option, the Theme
2. tre display: Colours subcategory can be used to adjust
Press My Car Lights and Lighting
further.
Interior Lighting. Changing the brightness of the lights
3. Choose between the following settings: 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
• Under Ambient Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
• Under Ambient Light Level, select from Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
Reduced and Full. 3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting. Controls located next to the steering wheel.
The intensity of the ambience light can be
adjusted using the controls in the instrument
panel:
– Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity.
Controls located next to the steering wheel.
The intensity of the ambient light can be adjusted
using the control in the instrument panel:
}}

* Option/accessory. 143
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Lighting in storage compartments in Home safe light duration Approach light duration
doors Some of the exterior lighting can be kept Approach lighting is switched on when the car is
The lighting in storage compartments in doors is switched on to work as home safe lighting after unlocked and is used to switch on the car's
switched on when the car is running. The bright- the car has been locked. lighting at a distance.
ness can be finely adjusted using the control in
the instrument panel. To activate the function: When the function is activated with the remote
control key during unlocking, the position lamps,
1. Switch off the car.
Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel lighting in outer handles*, number plate lighting,
console 2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward interior roof lighting and floor lighting will switch
The lighting in the front cup holders is switched toward the instrument panel and release. on. If a door is opened within the activation time,
on when the car is unlocked and is switched off 3. Get out of the car and lock the door. the time for the lighting in the outside handles*
when the car is locked. The brightness can be and the interior lighting will be extended.
finely adjusted using the control in the instrument When the function is activated, dipped beam,
position lamps, lighting in the outside handles* The function can be deactivated/activated via the
panel. centre display.
and number plate lighting are switched on.
Related information The length of time that home safe lighting Related information
• Lighting control (p. 131) remains on can be set via the centre display. • Home safe light duration (p. 144)
• Ignition positions (p. 403)
• Remote control key (p. 230)
Related information
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
• Approach light duration (p. 144) • Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165)

144 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using windscreen wipers Intermittent wiping Activating/deactivating the rain


The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen. Set the number of sweeps per time unit sensor
Different settings for the windscreen wiper are with the thumbwheel when intermittent The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk wiping is selected. screen wipers based on how much water it
switch. detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitiv-
Continuous wiping ity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the
Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to
right-hand stalk switch.
sweep at normal speed.
Raise the stalk switch further for the wip-
ers to sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any
snow or ice on the windscreen and rear win-
dow is scraped away.

Right-hand stalk switch.


IMPORTANT
Thumbwheel, used to set rain sensor* sensi-
tivity and wiper swipe frequency. Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers Right-hand stalk switch.
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen Rain sensor button
Single sweep must be wet when the windscreen wipers are
Lower the stalk switch and release to operating. Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
make one sweep.
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor
Windscreen wipers off Related information symbol is shown in the driver display.
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to • Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
switch off the windscreen wipers. (p. 145) Activating the rain sensor
• Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146) When activating the rain sensor, the car must be
running or the electrical system in ignition posi-
• Rear window wiper and washer (p. 147)
tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
• Wiper blades in service position (p. 547)
}}

* Option/accessory. 145
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| switch must be in position 0 or in the position for Activating/deactivating the memory Windscreen and headlamp washers
a single sweep. function Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen- The memory function for the rain sensor can be windscreen and headlamps. Washing/wiping is
activated in such a way that the rain sensor but- started by means of the right-hand stalk switch.
sor button .
ton does not need to be depressed each time the
Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to car is started: Starting windscreen and headlamp
make an extra sweep. washers
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv- display.
ity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra
2. Press My Car Wipers.
sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
upward. 3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain Related information
sensor button or moving the stalk switch • Using windscreen wipers (p. 145)
up to another wiper program.
• Wiper blades in service position (p. 547)
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in • Rear window wiper and washer (p. 147)
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
switched off. Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when – Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the
wiper blades are set in service position. The rain steering wheel to start the windscreen and
sensor is reactivated when service position has headlamp washers.
been deactivated.
> The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps once the stalk switch has
IMPORTANT been released.
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti- IMPORTANT
vate the rain sensor while the car is running
Avoid activating the washer system when it is
or when the car's electrical system is in igni-
frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, other-
tion position I or II. The symbol in the driver
wise there is a risk of damaging the pump.
display extinguishes.

146
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Heated washer nozzles* Rear window wiper and washer – Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear switch forward to start rear window washing
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from window. Washing/wiping is started and settings and wiping.
freezing. are changed by means of the right-hand steering
Activating/deactivating wiping when
wheel stalk switch.
Headlamp washing* reversing
To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto- 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
NOTE
matically at a defined interval when the head- display.
lamps are switched on. The rear window wiper is equipped with over-
heating protection which means that the 2. Press My Car Wipers.
Reduced washing motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear 3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti-
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in window wiper works again after a cooling- vate wiping when reversing.
the reservoir and the message Washer fluid down period.
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wip-
Level low, refill, together with the symbol,
ers are on initiates rear window wiping. The func-
is shown in the driver display, then the supply of Using the rear window wiper and tion stops when reverse gear is disengaged.
washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. washer
This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind- If the rear window wiper is already on at continu-
screen and the visibility through it. ous speed, no change is made.

Related information Related information


• Using windscreen wipers (p. 145) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 145)
• Rear window wiper and washer (p. 147) • Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146)
• Filling washer fluid (p. 549) • Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 145)
• Filling washer fluid (p. 549)

Select for intermittent wiping with the


rear window wiper.
Select for continuous speed with the
rear window wiper.

* Option/accessory. 147
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Power windows Operating power windows Operating


Using the driver's door control panel, all power Using the driver's door control panel, all power
windows can be operated - using the control windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors operates the power panels in the other doors operates the power
window in the individual door. window in the individual door.

WARNING
Check that no children or other passengers
are trapped when the windows are closed
from the driver's door.

WARNING
Check that no children or other passengers Operating the power windows.
are trapped if/when the windows are closed Operating without auto
using the remote control key.
Operating with auto

Driver's door control panel. WARNING Using the driver's door control panel, all power
If there are children in the car - remember to windows can be operated - using the control
Electric child safety locks* that prevent chil-
always switch off the power supply to the panels in the other doors can only operate the
dren from being able to open the rear doors
power windows by setting the car's electrical power window in the individual door. Only one
from inside and open/close the rear win- system in ignition position 0 and then take control panel can be operated at a time.
dows. the remote control key with you when leaving
Controls for rear windows. the car. In order for the power windows to be used, the
ignition position must be at least I. The power
Controls for front windows. windows can be operated for a few minutes after
WARNING the car has been switched off and after the igni-
Related information Never leave children alone in the car. tion has been switched off - although not after a
• Operating power windows (p. 148) door has been opened.

• Child safety locks (p. 256)

148 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

NOTE It is possible to override the pinch protection Adjusting the door mirrors
when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if ice has The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise formed on the window. After two successive clos- joystick in the driver's door control panel.
when the rear windows are open is to also ing interruptions the pinch protection will be over-
open the front windows slightly. ridden and the automatic function deactivated for
a short while, now it is possible to close by hold-
ing the button in its raised position.
NOTE
The windows cannot be opened at speeds Resetting
above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph), If the starter battery is disconnected then the
but they can be closed. function for automatic opening must be reset so
that it can work correctly.
Operating without auto 1. Gently raise the front section of the button to
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The raise the window to its end position and hold
power windows move up/down as long as the it there for one second.
control is held in position. 2. Release the button briefly.
Controls for door mirrors.
Operating with auto 3. Raise the front section of the button again
Move one of the controls up/down to the end for one second. Adjusting
position and release it. The window runs auto- 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mir-
matically to its end position. ror or the R button for the right-hand door
WARNING mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
Operating with the remote control key, door
A reset must take place for pinch protection
handle or central locking button to work. 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
To operate the power windows with the remote centre.
control key, door handles on the outside, or from
Related information 3. Press the L or R button again. The light
the inside with the central locking button, see the
• Power windows (p. 148) should no longer be illuminated.
section "Remote control key", "Locking/unlock-
ing from the outside" or "Locking/unlocking from • Child safety locks (p. 256)
the inside". WARNING
• Ignition positions (p. 403)
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
Pinch protection • Remote control key (p. 230) vision. Objects may appear further away than
Closing of the windows is stopped and the win- • Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235) they actually are.
dow is opened if anything prevents its movement.
• }}
Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239)

149
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Memory function in power front seat* Automatic angling of the door mirror Resetting to neutral
Door mirror positions can be saved in the mem- when parking30 Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
ory function of the power front seat. When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is an external force must be reset electrically to the
automatically angled down so that the driver can neutral position for electric retracting/extending
Retractable power door mirrors* see the side of the road when parking for exam- to work correctly:
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving ple. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
in narrow spaces: 1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
automatically returns to its original position after
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously a short time. 2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-
(ignition position must be at least I). tons.
Settings for this function are set via the centre
2. Release them after approximately 1 second. display: 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors automatically stop in the fully 1. Press Settings in the top view. The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
retracted position.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry. Automatic dimming*
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati- 3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, by the interior rearview and door mirrors.
cally stop in the fully extended position. select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function
Angling the door mirror when parking30 review mirror should be angled. requires that the interior rearview mirror also has
The door mirror can be angled down for the automatic dimming, see the section "Interior rear-
driver to view the side of the road when parking Automatic retraction when locking* view mirror".
for example. When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote
Automatic dimming is always active while driving,
control key the door mirrors are automatically
– Engage reverse gear and press the L or R apart from when gearbox reverse position is
retracted/extended.
button. selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in
The function can be activated/deactivated via the three levels and will affect the interior rearview
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
centre display: and the door mirrors.
automatically returns to its original position after
approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the 1. Press Settings in the top view.
button labelled L or R respectively.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate/deactivate.

30 Only in combination with power seat with memory.

150 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

NOTE Interior rearview mirror Automatic dimming*


The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
When sensitivity is changed there is no imme- by the rearview mirror. The control for manual
a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively,
diately noticeable change in dimming, but the dimming is not available on mirrors with auto-
the rearview mirror dims automatically.
change will be complete after a while. matic dimming.
The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one
Settings for this function are set via the centre
forward facing and one rearward facing - that
display:
work together to identify and eliminate dazzling
1. Press Settings in the top view. light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient
light, while the rearward facing sensor detects
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry. the light from vehicle headlights behind.
3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light. NOTE
Related information If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
• Interior rearview mirror (p. 151) permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in
the seats or in the cargo area in such a way
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
that light is prevented from reaching the sen-
Control for dimming
• Using the memory function in the power sors, then the dimming function of the interior
front seat* (p. 121) rearview and door mirrors is reduced.
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the
rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dim- Automatic dimming is always active while driving,
ming with the dimming control when lights from apart from when gearbox reverse position is
behind are distracting: selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in
three levels and will affect the interior rearview
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
and the door mirrors.
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal mode by moving the control NOTE
towards the windscreen.
When sensitivity is changed there is no imme-
diately noticeable change in dimming, but the
change will be complete after a while.

}}

* Option/accessory. 151
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Settings for this function are set via the centre Compass* Related information
display: The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir- • Calibrating the compass* (p. 153)
1. Press Settings in the top view. ror has an integrated display that shows the • Ignition positions (p. 403)
compass direction in which the front of the car is
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry. pointing.
• Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 188)
3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.

Related information
• Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 149)
• Settings in the centre display (p. 165)

Rearview mirror with compass.


Eight different compass directions are shown by
their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

Activating/deactivating the compass


The compass is activated automatically when the
car is started.
To deactivate/activate the compass:
– Depress the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.

152 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Calibrating the compass* 7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the char-


The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The acter C is shown in the display when the
compass should be calibrated if the car is heated windscreen is activated, perform the
moved between several magnetic zones. calibration in accordance with point 6 above
with the heated windscreen activated.
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power lines. Related information
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical • Compass* (p. 152)
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and
ensure that all doors are closed.
Magnetic zones.
NOTE 4. Press the button repeatedly until the
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electri- required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
cal equipment is not switched off. See the map of magnetic zones for the com-
pass.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear- 5. Wait until the display returns to showing the
view mirror depressed (use a paper clip or character C, or hold the button on the under-
similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The number of side of the rearview mirror depressed for
the current magnetic zone is shown. approx. 6 seconds until the character C is
shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2
circles to fine-tune calibration.

* Option/accessory. 153
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Panorama roof* WARNING IMPORTANT


The panorama roof is divided into two glass sec-
tions. The front section can be opened vertically
Children, other passengers or objects may be • Remove ice and snow before opening the
trapped by the panoramic roof's moving parts. panoramic roof.
at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizon-
tally (open position). The rear section is fixed • Always operate the panoramic roof with • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
roof glass. caution. has frozen closed.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector. • Do not allow children to play with the
controls. Wind deflector
The panorama roof has a sun blind made of per- • Never leave children alone in the car.
forated fabric and located under the glass roof to
provide extra protection from factors such as • Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the panoramic roof by setting
strong sunlight.
the car's electrical system in ignition posi-
tion 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
• Never put an object or part of the body
through the panoramic roof, even if the
car's electrical system is fully discon-
nected.

IMPORTANT The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is


• Do not open the panoramic roof when raised when the panorama roof is in the open
load carriers are fitted. position.
• Do not place any heavy objects on the Related information
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated panoramic roof.
with a control located in the roof.
• Operating the panorama roof* (p. 155)
• Ignition positions (p. 403)
The control is activated when the car's electrical
system is in ignition position I or II.

154 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Operating the panorama roof* IMPORTANT Ventilation position


When operating with the control in the roof, the
panoramic roof is first opened horizontally to a
• Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
comfort position.
• Do not place any heavy objects on the
In ventilation position, the front glass cover in the panoramic roof.
roof is raised at the rear.

WARNING IMPORTANT
Children, other passengers or objects may be • Remove ice and snow before opening the
trapped by the panoramic roof's moving parts. panoramic roof.
• Always operate the panoramic roof with • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
caution. has frozen closed.
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
• Do not allow children to play with the
controls. In order that the panoramic roof and sun blind Open by pressing the control upward.
• Never leave children alone in the car. can be operated, the car's electrical system must Close by pressing the control forward/down-
be in at least ignition position I. Turn the start
• Remember to always switch off the power
knob clockwise and then release it. The panor-
ward.
supply to the panoramic roof by setting When the ventilation position is selected the front
amic roof and sun blind are operated using the
the car's electrical system in ignition posi- glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun
control in the ceiling.
tion 0, and then take the remote control blind is fully closed when ventilation position is
key with you when leaving the car. selected, then it opens automatically approx.
• Never put an object or part of the body 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
through the panoramic roof, even if the The sun blind follows automatically if the panor-
car's electrical system is fully discon- amic roof is closed from ventilation position.
nected.

}}

* Option/accessory. 155
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Operating with the control in the roof 2. Open the panorama roof - press the control 2. To open the panorama roof, press the control
backwards a second time to the position for backwards a second time to the position for
manual opening. The panoramic roof first automatic opening and release. The panor-
reaches comfort position31. In order to open amic roof first reaches comfort position31. To
to maximum opening position - press the open to the maximum opening position -
control backwards a third time. press the control a third time backward to
the position for automatic opening and
Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding
release.
procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward/downward to the manual closing position Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding
instead. procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward/downward to the automatic closing posi-
The movement of the roof is stopped if the con-
tion instead.
trol is released or when the glass reaches the
comfort position or the maximum opening or The movement of the roof is stopped when the
Opening, manual closing position. The movement is also stopped if glass reaches the comfort position or the maxi-
Opening, automatic the control is operated again in the opposite mum opening or closing position. The movement
direction to the direction of movement in pro- is also stopped if the control is operated again in
Closing, manual gress. the opposite direction to the direction of move-
ment in progress.
Closing, automatic
NOTE The movement of the roof is not stopped when
Manual operation For manual opening, the sun blind must be the glass reaches the comfort position when
1. To open the sun blind - press the control fully open before the panoramic roof can be closing from maximum opening position.
backwards to the position for manual open- opened. When the procedure is reversed, the
ing. The sun blind moves towards maximum panoramic roof must be fully closed before
opening position for as long as the control is the sun blind can be fully closed.
held depressed rearward.
Automatic operation
1. Open the sun blind to maximum position -
press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.

31 Comfort position is an open position for the glass cover, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.

156
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Automatic operation - rapid opening/closing 2. Press My Car Locking. the driver's door or passenger door* can be used
The panorama roof and sun blind can be to close the panoramic roof.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
opened/closed simultaneously:
activate/deactivate. – Give a long press on the central locking but-
– To open - press the control rearward to the ton until the panorama roof and sun blind
automatic operation position twice and Closing using the remote control key, start moving towards the closed position.
release. central locking button or door handles Then release the button.
– To close - press the control forward/down- Remote control key Movement stops if the central locking button is
ward to the automatic operation position – Give a long press on the remote control key's pressed again or when the roof/blind has
twice and release. lock button until the panorama roof and reached the closed position.
The movement of the roof is stopped when the sun blind start moving towards the closed Door handle
glass reaches the comfort position or the closing position. Then release the lock button.
Cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*
position. When closing from maximum opening Movement stops if the remote control key's lock have a touch-sensitive recess on the outer part of
position, the movement is not stopped at comfort button is pressed again or when the roof/blind the outside door handle.
position. The movement of the blind is not stop- has reached the closed position.
ped when the roof reaches comfort position. The – Place your finger against the touch-sensitive
Central locking button recess on the outside of one of the door
movement is also stopped if the control is oper-
handles until the panorama roof and sun
ated again in the opposite direction to the direc-
blind start moving towards the closed posi-
tion of movement in progress.
tion. Then remove your finger from door han-
Automatic closing of the sun blind dle's recess.
When the car is parked in hot weather, the sun Movement stops if you place your finger against
blind closes automatically 15 minutes after the the door handle recess again or once the roof/
car has been locked. This is in order to lower the blind has reached the closed position.
passenger compartment temperature and protect
the car upholstery from being bleached by the
WARNING
sun.
If the panorama roof is closed with the remote
The function is deactivated when the car is sup- control key, the central locking button or door
plied from the factory and can be activated/deac- handle, check that no one risks being trapped.
Central locking button.
tivated:
When the car's electrical system is set in at least
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
ignition position I, the central locking button in
display.
}}

* Option/accessory. 157
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| IMPORTANT • Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235) HomeLink®*32


Check that the panoramic roof is properly HomeLink® is a programmable remote control
closed when closing. that is integrated into the car's electrical system.

General
Pinch protection
The panorama roof has pinch protection that is
triggered if the glass cover or the sun blind is
blocked by an object during closing. In the event
of blocking, the glass cover or sun blind stops
and is then opened automatically to approx.
50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked posi-
tion (or to full ventilation position). The pinch pro-
tection is also active when the glass cover or sun
blind is opened.
If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still
possible to operate the glass cover and/or sun
blind once more in the same direction without Button 1
pinch protection, if this is done within 10 seconds
after pinch protection deployment. It is therefore Button 2
possible to override the pinch protection when
Button 3
closing has been interrupted e.g. if ice has
formed around the glass cover, by continually Indicator lamp
pressing the control forward/downward until the
glass cover and/or sun blind is closed. HomeLink®33 is a programmable remote control
that can remotely control up to three different
Related information devices (e.g., garage door openers, alarm sys-
• Panorama roof* (p. 154) tems, outdoor and indoor lighting, etc.) and thus
• Ignition positions (p. 403) replace their remote controls. HomeLink® is sup-
plied built into the interior rearview mirror. The
• Remote control key (p. 230)
HomeLink® panel consists of three programma-
• Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239)

158 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

ble buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror deleted when the car is sold; see the section Programming HomeLink®*34
glass. "Programming HomeLink®". Instructions for programming HomeLink®.
For more information about HomeLink®, visit Related information
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ Programming HomeLink®
• Programming HomeLink®* (p. 159)
HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number NOTE
+49 6838 907 277).
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position" before
WARNING HomeLink® can be programmed or used.
• If HomeLink® is used to control a garage Preferably fit new batteries in the remote con-
door or gate, ensure that nobody is near trol that will be replaced by HomeLink® for
the door or gate while it is in motion. faster programming and improved transmis-
• While programming HomeLink, the sion of the radio signal. The HomeLink® but-
garage door or gate being programmed tons should be reset before programming,
may activate. For this reason, make sure see the heading "Resetting the HomeLink®
that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or buttons". When the reset is complete,
gate while programming is in progress. HomeLink® is set in "learn mode" and ready
for programming.
• The car should be outside the garage
while a garage door opener is being pro-
grammed. 1. Press the button35 on HomeLink® you want
• Do not use HomeLink® for any garage to program. The indicator lamp35 on
door that does not have safety stop and HomeLink® should flash yellow once per
safety reverse. second. It is not necessary to hold the button
depressed.
Save the original remote controls for future pro-
gramming (e.g. when changing to another car or
for use in another vehicle). It is also recom-
mended that the programming for the buttons is

32 Applies to certain markets.


33 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. }}

* Option/accessory. 159
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| 2. Aim the remote control towards the 4. Press and release the button on the original
HomeLink® button to be programmed and remote control every other second until the
hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches) indicator lamp has changed from flashing
from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator yellow once per second to either flashing
lamp on HomeLink®. green 10 times per second or illuminating in
a constant green glow.
Note: The ability of some remote controls to
program HomeLink® is improved at a dis- 5. Depress the programmed HomeLink® button
tance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12 and check the indicator lamp.
inches). Bear this in mind if you encounter > Constant green glow: If the indicator
problems during programming. lamp illuminates in a constant green glow, 6. Locate programming button36 on the
programming is complete. The garage receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
3. Press and hold the button on the original
door, gate or similar should now be acti- normally located near the antenna bracket on
remote control to be programmed on
vated when the programmed button is the receiver.
HomeLink® and keep an eye on the indicator
depressed.
lamp. Do not release the button until the 7. Depress and release the receiver's program-
indicator lamp has switched from flashing Flashes green 10 times per second: ming button. Step 8 must be completed
yellow once per second to either flashing Depress the button being programmed, within 30 seconds of the button being
green 10 times per second or illuminating in hold it depressed for 2 seconds and depressed.
a constant green glow. The button on the then release it. Repeat the sequence of
8. Depress the button being programmed, hold
remote control can be released once the pressing/holding/releasing a second time
it depressed for 2 seconds and then
indicator lamp flashes or illuminates in green. and, depending on the receiver model,
release it. Repeat the sequence of press-
even a third time. Programming should
Note: For some receivers, programming step ing/holding/releasing a second time and,
now be complete and the garage door,
3 may need to be replaced with the instruc- depending on the receiver model, even a
gate or similar should now be activated
tions in step 4. third time. Programming is now be com-
when the programmed button is
plete and the garage door, gate or similar
depressed.
should now be activated when the pro-
If the receiver is still not activated: grammed button is depressed.
Continue with programming steps 6-8 to
complete programming.

34 Applies to certain markets.


35 See section "HomeLink®*" for the location of buttons and indicator lamp.
36 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

160
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Operation 1. Depress buttons 1 and 3 on HomeLink® and Trip computer


When HomeLink® is fully programmed it can be hold them depressed until the indicator lamp The car's trip computer records and calculates
used in place of the separate original remote begins flashing green (about 10 seconds). vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption
controls. 2. Release the buttons. and average speed whilst driving.
Depress the programmed button. The garage > HomeLink® is now set to "learn mode" In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, informa-
door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated and is ready to be reprogrammed; see the tion is recorded about both instantaneous and
(may take a few seconds). If the button is section "Programming HomeLink®" average fuel consumption. The information from
depressed for more than 20 seconds then the above. the trip computer can be shown in the driver dis-
programming is deleted. The indicator lamp illu- play.
minates or flashes when the button has been Programming individual buttons
depressed. Naturally the original remote controls To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button,
can still be used in parallel with HomeLink® if proceed as follows:
required.
1. Depress the required button and do not
release.
NOTE
2. After approx. 20 seconds when the indicator
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink® will lamp on HomeLink® starts to flash yellow,
work for 30 minutes after the driver's door start with step 1 from the section "Program-
has been opened.
ming HomeLink®" above.
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is
In the event of programming problems, contact
not programmed with a new unit, it will
HomeLink® at www.HomeLink.com,
resume the previously saved programming.
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the
toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the For more information or to provide feedback
toll number +49 6838 907 277). about HomeLink®, visit www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink® toll number +49 6838 907 277).
buttons at the same time, not each button indi-
vidually. However, individual buttons can be Related information
reprogrammed; see the section "Programming • HomeLink®* (p. 158)
individual buttons" below.
}}

* Option/accessory. 161
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| • Distance to empty tank The calculation is based on the average fuel con-
• Tourist - alternative speedometer sumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity.
Trip meter When the gauge shows "----", there is not
There are two trip meters, TM and TA. enough fuel left to be able to calculate the
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset auto- remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
matically if the car is not used for at least four
hours. NOTE
The following information is registered while driv- There may be a slight deviation if the driving
ing: style has been changed.
• Mileage
12-inch driver display*. An economic driving style generally results in a
• Driving time
longer driving distance.
• Average speed
• Average fuel consumption. Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it eas-
The values apply from the trip meter's latest
ier to drive in countries where speed limit signs
reset.
are in a different unit than that shown in the car's
Odometer instruments.
The odometer records the car's total mileage. The digital speed is then shown in the opposite
This value cannot be reset to zero. unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer.
If the analogue speedometer is graduated in
Instantaneous fuel consumption
mph, the digital speedometer shows the corres-
This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the
ponding speed in km/h and vice versa.
car has at the moment. The value is updated
8-inch driver display.
approximately every second. Related information
The following meters are included in the trip
computer: Distance to empty tank • Show trip data in the driver display (p. 163)
The trip computer calculates the remaining mile- • Show trip statistics in the centre display
• Trip meter
age with the fuel available in the tank. (p. 164)
• Odometer
• Instantaneous fuel consumption

162 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Show trip data in the driver display 1. Open the app menu in the driver display by Resetting the trip meter
The trip computer's recorded and calculated val- pressing (1).
ues can be shown in the driver display. (It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via
in the driver display. The message must be
the app menu, you can choose which information
confirmed before the app menu can be
is shown on the driver display.
opened.)
2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or
right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured
values for trip meter TM. The next four
menu rows show measured values for trip
meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with
(3). – Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e.
mileage, average consumption, average
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select speed and driving time) with a long press on
which information to show in the driver dis- the RESET button on the left-hand stalk
play: switch.
• Distance to empty tank A short press on the RESET button resets
Open and navigate in the app menu37 using the right-
hand steering wheel keypad. • Odometer only the mileage.
App menu • Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no dis- Trip meter TA only has automatic resetting. The
play of mileage meter is reset if the car is not used for four hours
Left/right or more.
• Instantaneous fuel consumption, average
Up/down consumption for TM or TA, alternatively,
no display of fuel consumption
Change unit
Confirm Change the units for mileage, speed, etc. via the
• Tourist (alternative speedometer). centre display as follows:
Select or deselect an option with the O but- 1. Press Settings in the top view.
ton (4). The change is made immediately.

37 The appearance of the display may vary depending on instrument variant. }}

163
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| 2. Press System System Languages and Show trip statistics in the centre
Units Units of Measurement. display
Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis-
3. Select the required unit standard: Metric,
played graphically in the centre display and pro-
Imperial or US. vide an overview that facilitates more fuel-effi-
cient driving.
NOTE
Open the Driver performance
In addition to in the trip computer, these units
app in app view in order to
are also changed in Volvo's navigation sys-
show the trip statistics.
tem*.
Each bar in the diagram sym-
bolises a distance of 1, 10 or
Related information 100 km, alternatively miles. The Trip statistics from the trip computer38.
• Trip computer (p. 161) bars are filled in from the right as driving pro-
Settings for trip statistics
• Show trip statistics in the centre display gresses. The bar on the far right shows the value
(p. 164) for the current distance. Press Preferences to
• Using the application menu in the driver dis- The average fuel consumption and total driving • change graph scale. Select resolution 1, 10
play (p. 104) time are calculated since the last time the trip or 100 km/miles for the bar.
statistics were reset. • reset data after every trip. Performed when
the car has been stationary for more than
4 hours.
• reset data for the current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average consumption
and total driving time are always reset simultane-
ously.

Change unit
Change the unit for mileage, fuel consumption,
etc. via the centre display as follows:

38 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on selected unit standard or updated software.

164 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

1. Press Settings in the top view. Settings in the centre display Changing a setting
2. Press System System Languages and Settings and information for many of the car's
functions can be managed in the centre display
Units Units of Measurement. settings menu.
3. Select the required unit standard: Metric,
Imperial or US. Opening/closing and navigating in the
settings
Related information
• Trip computer (p. 161)
• Show trip data in the driver display (p. 163)

A subcategory in the settings menu with different types


of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio but-
tons).
1. Press on categories and subcategories to
navigate to the required setting.
2. Change one or more settings. Different types
Top view with button for Settings.
of settings are changed in different ways
1. Open the top view by pressing the tab or by (see the table below for a description of each
dragging/swiping across the screen from the type).
top down. > The changes are saved immediately.
2. Press Settings to open the settings menu.
3. Press one of the categories shown and navi-
gate to subcategories and respective set-
tings by pressing again.
4. Press Back to go back in the settings menu.
Press Close to close the settings menu.

}}

165
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Types of settings Related information Categories in the settings menu


There are several different types of settings: • Overview of the centre display (p. 33) The settings menu in the centre display has a
• Navigating in the centre display's views number of main categories and subcategories
Setting Description (p. 40) where settings and information for many of the
type car's functions are collected.
• Categories in the settings menu (p. 166)
Trigger Starts an app or separate view • Changing system settings in the settings There are 7 main categories under settings: My
function for more advanced settings menu (p. 168) Car, Sound, Navigation, Media,
through a press on the text, e.g. Communication, Climate and System.
to connect a device with
In turn, each category contains a number of sub-
Bluetooth®. categories and setting options. The tables below
Radio but- Select a setting from several show the first level of subcategories. The setting
ton options by pressing the required options for a function or area are described in
radio button, e.g. to select a sys- more detail in the corresponding section of the
tem language. owner's manual. For system settings not descri-
bed in the corresponding section, see the section
Multi- Select a level for something by "Changing system settings in the settings menu".
selector pressing the required part of the
Some settings are personal, which means that
button button, e.g. to select a sensitivity
they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other set-
level for City Safety.
tings are global, which means they are not linked
Checkbox Activate/deactivate a function by to a driver profile. The tables below provide an
pressing on the box to select/ overview showing whether a category's settings
deselect it, e.g. to select auto- are personal, global or a mixture of both.
matic start of seat heating.
My Car
Slider Select a level for something
Subcategories Settings
within an interval by pressing and
dragging the slider, e.g. to select Displays Personal
volume level.
IntelliSafe Mixed
Display of No actual setting. Shows infor-
informa- mation about something, e.g. the Drive Mode/Individual Drive Mixed
tion car's identification number. Mode*

166 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Subcategories Settings Media Climate


Subcategories Settings The main category Climate has no subcatego-
Lights and Lighting Mixed ries.
AM/FM radio Personal
Mirrors and Easy Entry Mixed System
DAB Personal
Locking Mixed Subcategories Settings

Parking Brake and Suspension Global Driver Profile Personal


Gracenote® Personal
Wipers Personal Date and Time –
TV* Personal
System Languages and Units Personal
Sound Video Personal
Subcategories Settings Keyboard Layouts Global
Communication Voice Control* Personal
Tone Personal
Subcategories Settings
Balance Personal Factory reset –
Phone –
System Volumes Mixed System Information Global
Text Messages –
Navigation Related information
Android Auto* –
Subcategories Settings • Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
Apple CarPlay* – • Changing system settings in the settings
Map Personal menu (p. 168)
Bluetooth Devices –
Route and Guidance Personal
Wi-Fi Global
Traffic Personal
Car Wi-Fi Hotspot Global

Car Modem Internet* Global

Volvo On Call* –

Volvo Service Networks Global

* Option/accessory. 167
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Changing system settings in the 2. Continue to System System Languages 2. Continue to System System
settings menu and Units Units of Measurement. Information Vehicle Identification
The System category in the centre display set- Number.
3. Select from the following unit standards:
tings menu collects general settings and infor- > The car's vehicle identification number
mation for car systems, such as language and • Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees (VIN39) is shown.
units. Celsius.
• Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees Related information
The system settings under Driver Profile, Date
and Time, System Languages and Units, Celsius. • Categories in the settings menu (p. 166)
Keyboard Layouts, Voice Control, Factory • US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren- • Driver profiles (p. 169)
reset and System Information are described in heit. • Clock (p. 97)
the corresponding section of the owner's manual. > The units in the driver display, centre dis- • Using the keyboard in the centre display
play and head-up display are changed. (p. 49)
Changing system language
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre See storage information • Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
display. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre • System updates (p. 531)
display.
2. Continue to System System Languages • Resetting settings in the settings menu
and Units. 2. Continue to System System (p. 169)
3. Select system language. Languages that Information Storage. • Book service and repair (p. 528)
support voice recognition have a voice recog- > Storage information for the car's hard disk
nition symbol. is shown, including total capacity, available
> The language in the driver display, centre capacity and how much space installed
display and head-up display is changed. applications are using.

Changing system units See the car's vehicle identification


Changing length and volume units number
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display. display.

39 Vehicle Identification Number.

168
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Resetting settings in the settings 4. Press OK to confirm the reset. Driver profiles
menu For Reset Personal Settings, the reset Many of the settings made in the car can be
It is possible to reset all modified settings in the must be confirmed by pressing Reset for adapted according to the driver's personal pref-
centre display settings menu to their default val- the active profile or Reset for all profiles. erences and can be saved in one or more driver
ues at once. profiles.
> Selected settings are reset.
Types of resets The personal settings are automatically saved in
Related information the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to
There are two different types of resets for set-
tings in the settings menu:
• Changing system settings in the settings a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the
menu (p. 168) car is adapted to the settings of that specific
• Factory Reset - clears all data and media • Driver profiles (p. 169) driver profile.
and resets all settings to their default values.
• Resetting user data for change of ownership
What settings are saved in the driver
• Reset Personal Settings - clears personal (p. 173)
data and resets personal settings to their profiles?
default values. Many of the settings made in the car will be auto-
matically saved in the active driver profile if the
Resetting settings profile is not locked; see the section "Editing a
driver profile". Settings made in the car are either
NOTE personal or global. Only personal settings are
saved in driver profiles.
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary. Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors,
front seats, navigation, audio and media system,
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
language and voice control.
display.
Some settings, referred to as global settings, can
2. Continue to System Factory reset. be changed but are not saved to a specific driver
3. Select the required reset type. profile. Changes to global settings affect all pro-
> A pop-up window is shown. files.

}}

169
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Global settings Selecting driver profile 2. Press Profile.


The global settings and parameters are not The last used driver profile is the one selected > The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
changed when changing between driver profiles. when the car is unlocked. It is possible to
They remain the same regardless of which driver 3. Select the driver profile required.
change to another driver profile after the car has
profile is active. been unlocked. 4. Press Confirm.
Keyboard layout settings are an example of > The driver profile is selected and the sys-
When the centre display has been started, the
global settings. If driver profile X is used to add tem loads the settings for the new driver
selected driver profile is shown at the top of the
additional languages to the keyboard, these profile.
screen. The driver profile last used is the one that
remain available for use even if driver profile Y is will be active next time the car is unlocked. How-
used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved Related information
ever, if the remote control key has been linked to • Driver profiles (p. 169)
to a specific driver profile - the settings are a driver profile then this is what is selected when
global. the car is started. See "Linking remote control • Editing a driver profile (p. 171)
Personal preferences key to driver profile". • Linking remote control key to driver profile
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre dis- (p. 172)
There are two options for changing to another
play brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by
driver profile.
this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X -
the brightness setting is a personal setting. Option 1:
Refer to the section "Categories in the settings 1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown
menu" for more information on which settings in the top of the centre display when the dis-
are personal and which are global. play has been started.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.
Related information
• Editing a driver profile (p. 171) 2. Select the driver profile required.
• Categories in the settings menu (p. 166) 3. Press Confirm.
• Selecting driver profile (p. 170) > The driver profile is selected and the sys-
tem loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
Option 2:
1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.

170
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Editing a driver profile 3. Save the name change by tapping on Back/ • Using the keyboard in the centre display
It is possible to change the name of the different Close. (p. 49)
driver profiles used in the car. > The name has now been changed. • Selecting driver profile (p. 170)

NOTE
A profile name cannot start with a space, as
the profile name will not then be saved.

Resetting settings in the driver profiles


Settings that have been saved to one or more
driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary.

NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
All types of changes to driver profiles are made
from the top view in the centre display - Settings 1. Press Settings in the top view.
System Driver Profiles.
2. Press System Factory Reset Reset
Renaming a driver profile Personal Settings.
Rename a driver profile starting from the Driver 3. Select one of the options Reset for the
Profile window:
active profile, Reset for all profiles or
1. Press Edit Profile. Cancel.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
Related information
edited.
• Driver profiles (p. 169)
2. Tap in the box Profile Name.
• Resetting settings in the settings menu
> A keyboard appears, and it is possible to (p. 169)
change the name. Tap on to close • Navigating in the centre display's views
the keyboard. (p. 40)

171
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Linking remote control key to driver 4. Drag down the top view again and tap on Related information
profile Settings System Driver Profiles • Driver profiles (p. 169)
It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. Edit Profile. • Editing a driver profile (p. 171)
The driver profile along with all of its settings will
then be automatically selected every time the car
5. Select Connect key to link the profile with • Remote control key (p. 230)
the key. It is not possible to link a driver pro-
is used with that specific remote control key. file to a different key than the one currently
The first time the remote control key is used, it is being used in the car. If there are multiple
not linked to any specific driver profile. When the keys in the car, the message More than one
car is started, the Guest profile will automatically key is found, put the key you want to
be activated. connect on backup reader will be dis-
played.
A driver profile can be selected manually without
linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked,
the last active driver profile is activated. Once the
key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver
profile does not need to be selected when that
specific key is used.

Linking a remote control key to a driver


profile
First select the profile to be linked to the key, if
the profile to be linked is not already active. The Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
active profile can then be linked to the key. > When the message Profile connected
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre to key is shown, the key and the driver
display. profile are linked.

2. 6. Press OK.
Press System Driver Profiles.
> This key is now linked to the driver profile
3. Select the desired profile. The display returns and will remain linked as long as the
to the home view. The Guest profile cannot Connect key box is not unticked.
be linked to a key.

172
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Changing settings for apps are always made inside the app and not from the Resetting user data for change of
All of the car's apps are listed in the app view. top view. ownership
The app settings that relate to the car's embed- In the event of a change of ownership, user data
Related information
ded functions can be changed from the centre and system settings should be restored to fac-
display's top view. • Navigating in the centre display's views
tory settings.
(p. 40)
Apps for embedded functions - basic • Settings in the centre display (p. 165) The settings in the car can be reset at different
apps levels. Restore all user data and system settings
• Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
to the original factory settings in the event of a
The apps installed in the car from the beginning, (p. 489)
e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and change of ownership. In the event of a change of
are part of the car's embedded functions. Set- • Categories in the settings menu (p. 166) ownership it is also important to change the
tings for these apps can be changed directly in owner of the Volvo On Call* service.
the top view in the centre display.
Related information
Change the settings for a basic app • Resetting settings in the settings menu
1. Tap on the app, e.g. FM radio. (p. 169)
2. Drag down the top view. • Volvo ID (p. 23)
3. Press FM Radio Settings.
4. Change settings as desired and confirm the
selections.
5. Press either the physical home button or the
virtual close button.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual
setting option, but not all. Refer to the section
"Categories in the settings menu" for more infor-
mation on how settings are changed.

Third party apps


Third party apps are not included in the car's sys-
tem from the beginning, but are the type that can
be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings

* Option/accessory. 173
CLIMATE CONTROL
CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate control 4-zone climate* • Parking climate* (p. 200)


The car is equipped with electronic climate con- • Voice recognition control of climate control
trol. The climate control system cools or heats as (p. 117)
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment.

2-zone climate

Climate zones with 4-zone climate.


With 4-zone climate the temperature in the pas-
senger compartment can be set separately for
the left and right-hand sides in both the front and
rear seat.
Climate zones with 2-zone climate. All climate control system functions are con-
trolled from the centre display and physical but-
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the pas-
tons in the centre console. The functions for the
senger compartment can be set separately for
rear seat can also be controlled from the climate
the left and right-hand sides.
panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
All climate control system functions are con-
trolled from the centre display and physical but- Related information
tons in the centre console. • Climate control - sensors (p. 177)
• Perceived temperature (p. 177)
• Air quality (p. 178)
• Climate controls (p. 180)
• Air distribution (p. 191)

176 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate control - sensors With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also Perceived temperature
The climate control system has a number of sen- an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate The climate control system regulates the climate
sors to help control the climate in the car. control system air intake. in the passenger compartment based on the
perceived temperature, not on actual tempera-
Sensor location Related information ture.
• Climate control (p. 176)
• Perceived temperature (p. 177) The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically per-
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179)
ceived temperature as affected by factors such
as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity,
solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the
time.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects
on which side the sun is shining into the passen-
ger compartment. This means that the tempera-
ture can differ between the right and left-hand
side's air vents despite the controls being set for
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the inte- the same temperature on both sides.
rior rearview mirror.
Related information
Outside temperature sensor - in the right- • Climate control (p. 176)
hand door mirror.
• Climate control - sensors (p. 177)
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instru-
ment panel. • Regulating the temperature (p. 185)

Temperature sensor for the passenger com-


partment - by the physical buttons in the
centre console.

NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth-
ing or other objects.

* Option/accessory. 177
CLIMATE CONTROL

Air quality NOTE


The materials selected for the passenger com-
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air
partment and the air cleaning system ensure that
quality is good. It only indicates that the con-
the air quality in the passenger compartment is
ditions for good air quality have been met.
high.

Materials in the passenger Related information


compartment • Climate control (p. 176)
The interior of the passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
• Passenger compartment filter (p. 179)
for people with contact allergies and for asthma • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 179)
sufferers. • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179)
Tested materials have been developed in order to The indicator is visible in the climate view in • Cleaning the interior (p. 570)
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger the centre display.
• Climate controls in the centre display
compartment and to contribute to making the The indicator is visible in the climate row (p. 181)
passenger compartment easier to keep clean. when the climate view is not open.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment If the conditions have not been met then the
and the cargo area are removable and easy to Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions
remove and clean. have been met, this is indicated by the text
Use cleaning agents and car care products rec- changing colour to blue.
ommended by Volvo to clean the interior. Conditions that are checked:

Air cleaning system • That all doors and the tailgate are closed.
In addition to the passenger compartment filter, • That all side windows and the panorama
Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air roof* are closed.
Quality System* also help to maintain high air • That the air quality system Interior Air Quality
quality in the passenger compartment. System* is activated.
Clean Zone* • That the ventilation fan is activated.
The Clean Zone function checks whether or not • That the air recirculation is deactivated.
all conditions have been met for good air quality
in the passenger compartment.

178 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

Passenger compartment filter Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System*
All air entering the car's passenger compartment Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto-
is cleaned with a filter. a series of modifications that keep the passen- matic air quality system that separates gases
ger compartment even clearer from allergy and and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
Replacing the passenger compartment asthma-inducing substances. contaminants in the passenger compartment.
filter
To maintain high climate system performance, The following is included: IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
the filter must be changed at regular intervals. Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passen-
• An enhanced fan function that means that
ger compartment from contaminants such as par-
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec- the fan starts when the car is unlocked with
ommended replacement intervals. If the car is ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-
the remote control key. The fan fills the pas-
used in a severely contaminated environment, it level ozone.
senger compartment with fresh air. The func-
may be necessary to replace the filter more often. tion starts when required and is disengaged If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
automatically after a time or when one of the air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and
NOTE passenger compartment doors is opened. air recirculation is activated.
There are different types of passenger com- The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil- gradually due to reduced need up until the NOTE
ter is fitted. car is 4 years old.
The air quality sensor must always be enabled
• The fully automatic air quality system Interior to ensure the best air in the passenger com-
Air Quality System (IAQS). partment.
Related information
• Air quality (p. 178) Related information In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 179) • Air quality (p. 178) to prevent misting.
• Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179) • Passenger compartment filter (p. 179) In the event of misting, the defrost functions
• Volvo service programme (p. 528) • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179) for windscreen, side windows and rear win-
dow should be used.

Activating/deactivating the air quality


sensor
It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor
should be activated/deactivated.

}}

* Option/accessory. 179
CLIMATE CONTROL

|| 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre Climate controls • Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
display. The climate control system's functions are con- and door mirrors (p. 188)
2. Press Climate. trolled from the centre display, physical buttons
in the centre console and the climate panel at
3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deac- the rear of the tunnel console*.
tivate the air quality sensor.
Overview of climate controls
Related information
• Air quality (p. 178)
• Passenger compartment filter (p. 179)
• Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 179)
• Activating/deactivating air recirculation
(p. 191)

Climate controls in the centre display.

Defrost buttons in the centre console.

Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel


console*.

Related information
• Climate control (p. 176)
• Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
• Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 182)

180 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate controls in the centre Climate view


display One tap on the centre button in the climate row
All climate functions can be regulated from the gives access to the climate view. The climate view
climate row and the climate view in the centre is divided into the tabs Main climate, Rear
display. climate* and Parking climate*. Change
between the tabs by swiping left/right or by
Climate row pressing the respective heading.
The most common climate functions can be
Main climate
regulated from the climate row.
In addition to the climate row's functions, other
main climate functions can also be controlled in
the Main climate tab.

Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting


Temperature controls for driver and passen- the windows and door mirrors.
ger side.
AC - Controls for air conditioning.
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as heated Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.
steering wheel*.
Controls for air distribution.
Button for access to the climate view. The
graphic on the button shows activated cli- Fan control for front seat (with 2-zone cli-
mate settings. mate, the control is shared with the rear
seat).

}}
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.

* Option/accessory. 181
CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Rear climate control* Parking climate* Climate controls at the rear of the
All climate functions for the rear seat can be The car's parking climate control can be regula- tunnel console*
regulated in the Rear climate tab. ted in the Parking climate tab. The rear seat's climate functions are controlled
from the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel
Related information console.
• Climate controls (p. 180)
• Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 188)
• Activating/deactivating air conditioning
(p. 184)
• Activating/deactivating air recirculation
(p. 191)
• Changing the air distribution (p. 192)
• Regulating the fan level (p. 187)
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183)
• Regulating the temperature (p. 185)
• Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* Controls for heated rear seat*.
(p. 197)
Fan controls for rear seat.
• Activating/deactivating ventilation of the
seats* (p. 198) Temperature controls for rear seat.
• Activating/deactivating heating of steering
Locking/unlocking button on the climate
wheel* (p. 199)
2nd row climate - Controls for climate func- panel.
tionality in the rear seat. Fan controls for rear
• Parking climate* (p. 200)
If the car is not equipped with a climate panel at
seat. the rear of the tunnel console, but has heated
Temperature controls for rear seat. rear seats*, there are physical buttons at the rear
of the tunnel console for controlling these.
Controls for heated rear seat*. The climate panel has a screen lock to prevent
unintentional change of fan speed and tempera-

182 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

ture. When the screen is locked, only the seat Auto-regulating the climate 2. Give a short or long press on AUTO.
controls* and the unlocking button are shown. With auto climate control activated, multiple cli- • Short press - air recirculation, air condi-
After unlocking, the fan speed and temperature mate functions are controlled automatically. tioning and air distribution are controlled
can be changed via the climate panel and all automatically.
selected climate settings are shown. The screen • Long press - air recirculation, air condi-
locks automatically after a period of inactivity. tioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically, temperature and fan level
Related information
are changed to standard settings: 22
• Climate controls (p. 180)
°C/72 °F and level 3 (level 2 in the rear
• Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* seat1).
(p. 197)
> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated
• Regulating the fan level (p. 187) and the button illuminates.
• Regulating the temperature (p. 185)
NOTE
Auto-regulation button in the climate view. Temperature and fan speed can be changed
without deactivating the automatically-regula-
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. ted climate control system. The automatically-
regulated climate control system is deacti-
vated when the air distribution is changed
manually or when maximum defroster is acti-
vated.

Related information
• Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
• Activating/deactivating air conditioning
(p. 184)

1 For cars with 4-zone climate*. }}

* Option/accessory. 183
CLIMATE CONTROL

• Activating/deactivating air recirculation Activating/deactivating air NOTE


(p. 191) conditioning
Close all side windows and the panoramic
• Changing the air distribution (p. 192) The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
roof* for air conditioning to work optimally.
incoming air as required.
• Regulating the temperature (p. 185)
• Regulating the fan level (p. 187) Activating/deactivating the main air
NOTE
conditioning
It is not possible to activate the air condition-
ing when the fan control is in Off position.

Related information
• Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183)

The air conditioning button in the climate view.


1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Press AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
When the air conditioning is activated, the
climate control system automatically con-
trols starting and switching off as
required.

184 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

Regulating the temperature Synchronising the temperature


The temperature can be set separately for the
left and right-hand sides. With 4-zone climate*
the temperature can also be set separately for
the front and rear seats.

Regulating temperature for front seat2

Temperature control.
2. Regulate the temperature by either of the Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature
controls.
following:
1. Press the driver's side temperature button in
• drag the control to the desired tempera-
the centre display's climate row in order to
ture, or
open the controls.
• press +/− to raise/lower the temperature
Temperature buttons in the climate row. gradually. 2. Press Synchronise temperature.
> The temperature changes and the button > The temperature for all zones in the car is
1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature
shows the set temperature. synchronised with the temperature set for
button in the centre display's climate row to
the driver's side and the synchronisation
open the controls.
symbol is shown adjacent to the tempera-
ture button.
Synchronisation is stopped by a further press on
Synchronise temperature or by changing the
passenger side or rear seat* temperature set-
tings.

2 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat. }}

* Option/accessory. 185
CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Regulating temperature for rear seat*


From the front seat

Temperature control. Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of


the tunnel console.
3. Regulate the temperature by means of the
Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the cli- following: 2. Press the left or right-hand side </> buttons
mate view. on the tunnel console's climate panel in
• drag the control to the desired tempera- order to lower/raise the temperature gradu-
1. Open the climate view in the centre display ture ally.
and select the tab for Rear climate.
• press +/− to raise/lower the temperature > The temperature changes and the screen
2. Press the left or right-hand side temperature gradually. in the climate panel shows the set tem-
button to open the control. > The temperature changes and the button perature.
shows the set temperature.
From the rear seat NOTE
1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
console climate panel to access the controls. selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.

Related information
• Climate controls (p. 180)
• Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)

186 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

• Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel Regulating the fan level Regulating fan level for rear seat*
console* (p. 182) The fan can be set to five different automatic fan From the front seat
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183) levels as well as Off and Max. With 4-zone cli-
mate* the fan level can be set separately for the
• Perceived temperature (p. 177)
front and rear seats.

Regulating fan level for front seat3

The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the


climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for Rear climate.
Fan control buttons in the climate view. 2. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. The rear seat's fan level can be switched off
2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max. by tapping on 2nd row climate.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for > Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate. the selected level illuminate.

IMPORTANT
If the fan is fully switched off then the air con-
ditioning is not engaged, which results in a
risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

3 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat. }}

* Option/accessory. 187
CLIMATE CONTROL

|| From the rear seat NOTE Activating/deactivating defrost of


1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel windows and door mirrors
console climate panel to access the controls. The climate control system automatically
The three functions max defroster, heated wind-
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
screen*, and heated rear window and door mir-
level based on requirements. This means that
rors are used to quickly remove misting and ice
the fan speed may change even though the
from the windows and door mirrors.
fan level is the same.
From physical buttons in the centre
Related information console
• Climate controls in the centre display The centre console contains physical buttons for
(p. 181) quick access to the defrost functions.
• Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel With heated windscreen* the max defroster can
console* (p. 182) only be activated individually from the climate
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183) view in the centre display.

Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tun-


nel console.
2. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.

NOTE
The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if
the fan level for the front seat is in position
Off.
The rear seat fan speed can only be switched Physical buttons in the centre console.
off from the climate view in the centre display. Button for heated windscreen* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door mir-
rors.

188 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

Cars without heated windscreen: From the climate view in the centre NOTE
– Press the button (1). display
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated Activating/deactivating max defroster noise level.
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Cars with heated windscreen:
– Press the button (1) repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
• Activated heated windscreen
• Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
• Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes. Max defroster button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
NOTE
2. Press Max.
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in > Max defroster is activated/deactivated
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
the heated windscreen is deactivated by two
quick presses of the button. Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation
of the climate and air recirculation, acti-
vates air conditioning and changes the
Rear window and door mirror defrosters:
fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI.
– Press the button (2).
When max defroster is deactivated, the
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are climate control system returns to the pre-
activated/deactivated and the button illu- vious settings.
minates/extinguishes.

}}

189
CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Activating/deactivating heated windscreen* NOTE Activating/deactivating automatic start


of heated windows
If the heated windscreen is activated when It is possible to set whether automatic start of
the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the
heated windscreen* and heated rear window and
engine then the engine will be restarted.
door mirrors should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic start
Activating/deactivating heated rear window activated, heating will start when there is a risk of
and door mirrors ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The
heating switches off automatically when the
windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the
ice or misting is gone.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
The button for heated windscreen in the climate view.
2. Press Climate.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/
2. Press Electric.
deactivate automatic start of heated wind-
> Heated windscreen is activated/deacti- screen.
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated rear
The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in
the climate view. window and door mirrors.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. Related information
the windscreen is not electrically heated, 2. Press Rear. • Climate controls (p. 180)
where de-icing may take longer. > Heated rear window and door mirrors are • Climate controls in the centre display
activated/deactivated and the button illu- (p. 181)
NOTE minates/extinguishes.

The heated windscreen may affect the per-


formance of transponders and other commu-
nication equipment.

190 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating/deactivating air NOTE Air distribution


recirculation The climate control system distributes the
It is not possible to activate air recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust incoming air via a number of different vents in
when max defroster is activated.
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate the passenger compartment.
control system reusing the air in the passenger
compartment. Activating/deactivating the timer for air Overview of air distribution
recirculation
It is possible set whether the air recirculation
timer should be activated/deactivated. When the
timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically
switched off after 20 minutes.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/
deactivate the air recirculation timer.

Related information Air distribution in the passenger compartment with 4-


The air recirculation button in the climate view. zone climate.
• Climate controls in the centre display
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. (p. 181) Automatic and manual air distribution
2. Press Recirc. • Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183) With auto-regulated climate running the air distri-
bution takes place automatically. If necessary, the
> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated
air distribution can be controlled manually.
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Adjustable air vents
IMPORTANT There are 6 or 8* adjustable air vents in the pas-
If the air in the car is recirculated for too long senger compartment depending on the number
then there is a risk of misting on the insides of climate zones.
of the windows.

}}

* Option/accessory. 191
CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Changing the air distribution Related information


The air distribution can be changed manually if • Air distribution (p. 191)
required. • Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 193)
• Table of air distribution options (p. 195)
• Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183)

Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger com-


partment.
With 2-zone climate - four on the instrument
panel and one on each of the door pillars
between the front and rear doors. The air distribution buttons in the climate view.

Addition with 4-zone climate* - two at the Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents
rear of the tunnel console.
Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel
Related information and centre console
• Climate control (p. 176) Air distribution - air vents in the floor
• Changing the air distribution (p. 192)
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
• Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
2. Press one or more of the air distribution but-
(p. 193)
tons in order to open/close the correspond-
• Table of air distribution options (p. 195) ing air flow.
• Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183) > The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.

192 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

Opening/closing and aiming the air Opening/closing the air vents Air vents for the rear seat:
vents Air vents for the front seat:
Some air vents in the passenger compartment
can be opened, closed and aimed individually.

If the door pillar vents and instrument panel outer


vents are aimed toward the side windows, then
misting can be removed.
If the door pillar vents are aimed inwards then, in
a hot climate, a comfortable environment is
obtained in the passenger compartment.

The air vent's thumbwheel4.


Air vent knob4. – Roll the thumbwheel in order to open/close
– Turn the knob in order to open/close the air the air flow from the nozzle.
flow from the vent. The longer the white lines on the thumb-
The air flow is at maximum when the marking wheel that are visible, the higher the air flow.
on the knob is in vertical position.

4 The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location. }}

193
CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Aiming the air vents

The air vent's lever4.


– Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to
aim the air flow from the nozzle.

Related information
• Air distribution (p. 191)
• Changing the air distribution (p. 192)
• Table of air distribution options (p. 195)

4 The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.

194
CLIMATE CONTROL

Table of air distribution options


The air distribution can be changed manually if
required. The following options are available for
setting.

Air distribution Purpose


If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.

Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate
(to achieve this, fan level must not be low).

Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
other air vents.

Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
vents.

}}

195
CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Air distribution Purpose


Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel. Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Some air flows from other air vents.

Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
flows from other air vents. humid climate.

Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor
floor. Some air flows from other air vents. temperatures.

Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
panel and air vents at the floor.

Related information • Opening/closing and aiming the air vents • Climate controls in the centre display
• Air distribution (p. 191) (p. 193) (p. 181)
• Changing the air distribution (p. 192)

196
CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating/deactivating heating of 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats From the rear seat
the seats* in order to change between the four levels: With 2-zone climate:
The seats can be heated in order to increase Off, High, Medium and Low.
comfort for driver and passengers when it is > The level changes and the button shows
cold. the set level.

Activating/deactivating heating of the Activating/deactivating heating of the


front seat* rear seat*
From the front seat*

Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel con-


sole.
– Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's physical buttons for heated seats at
the rear of the tunnel console to switch
between the four levels: Off, High, Medium
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
and Low.
1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering Buttons for heated seats in the group Rear climate in
> The level changes and the LEDs in the
wheel and seat button in the climate row in the climate view.
button show the set level.
the centre display in order to open the con- 1. Open the climate view in the centre display
trols for seat and steering wheel. and select the tab for Rear climate. With 4-zone climate*:
If the car is not equipped with ventilated 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
seats or heated steering wheel, the button in order to change between the four levels:
for heated seats is immediately available in Off, High, Medium and Low.
the climate row.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.

}}

* Option/accessory. 197
CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Activating/deactivating automatic start Activating/deactivating ventilation of


of heated seats the seats*
It is possible to set whether automatic start of The seats can be ventilated to provide increased
heated seats should be activated/deactivated comfort in a hot climate, for example.
when the engine is started. With automatic start
activated, heating will start in the event of low The ventilation system consists of fans in the
ambient temperature. seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre cooler the passenger compartment air becomes.
display. The system can be activated when the engine is
2. Press Climate. running.
3. Under Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and
Seat heating indication and controls on the climate
panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level,
select Off, Low, Medium or High in order to
– Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand activate/deactivate the automatic starting of
side's buttons for heated seats on the tunnel the heating for the driver and passenger
console's climate panel to switch between seats and to select the level.
the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the screen in the Related information
climate panel shows the set level. • Climate controls (p. 180)
• Climate controls in the centre display
WARNING (p. 181)
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the con-
trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.

198 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating/deactivating ventilation of Related information Activating/deactivating heating of


the front seat* • Climate controls (p. 180) steering wheel*
• Climate controls in the centre display The steering wheel can be heated in order to
(p. 181) increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.

Activating/deactivating heating of
steering wheel

Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.


1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the con-
trols for seat and steering wheel.
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and
or heated steering wheel, the button for ven-
seat button in the climate row of the centre
tilated seats is immediately available in the
display in order to open the controls for seat
climate row.
and steering wheel.
2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
seats in order to change between the four
or ventilated seats, the button for heated
levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
steering wheel is immediately available in the
> The level changes and the button shows climate row.
the set level.

}}

* Option/accessory. 199
CLIMATE CONTROL

|| 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated Parking climate* Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via
steering wheel in order to change between The climate of the car's passenger compartment the timer.
the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. can be preconditioned or maintained while the The function utilises several systems in different
> The level changes and the button shows car is parked. cases:
the set level.
• The parking heater*, in a cold climate, warms
Activating/deactivating automatic start up both the passenger compartment and the
of heated steering wheel engine.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of • When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
heated steering wheel should be activated/deac- passenger compartment by blowing in air
tivated when the engine is started. With auto- from outside the car.
matic start activated, heating will start in the
event of low ambient temperature. NOTE
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre During preconditioning of the passenger
display. compartment, the car works to reach comfort
2. Press Climate. temperature and not the temperature set in
the climate control system.
3. Under Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level, select Off,Low,Medium or High in
order to activate/deactivate the automatic Climate comfort retention
starting of steering wheel heating and to The climate in the car's passenger compartment
select the level. can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if
the engine needs to be switched off but the
Related information driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car
• Climate controls (p. 180) and maintain the level of climate comfort.
• Climate controls in the centre display Preconditioning and climate comfort retention are con- Starting climate comfort retention is only possible
(p. 181) trolled from the Parking climate tab in the centre dis- via direct start.
• Steering wheel (p. 129) play's climate view.

Preconditioning
Preconditioning of the car before driving can
reduce wear and energy needs during a journey.

200 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

The function utilises several systems in different Starting/stopping preconditioning* NOTE


cases: Preconditioning warms the passenger compart-
The car's doors and windows should be
• Residual heat from the engine, in a cold cli- ment and engine or airs the passenger compart-
closed during the preconditioning of the pas-
mate, heats the passenger compartment to ment before driving. The function can use direct
senger compartment.
comfort temperature. start from the centre display or a mobile phone.
• When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air Starting/stopping from the centre WARNING
from outside the car. display Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
NOTE • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
Climate comfort retention is switched off gases are emitted if the heater starts.
when the car is locked from the outside to • In locations with combustible or flamma-
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
of the function is intended to maintain climate sawdust, etc. may ignite.
comfort when driver or passengers remain
• When there is a risk that the heater’s
inside the car. exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
Related information wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
• Climate control (p. 176) ventilation.
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201) Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in Remember that the preconditioning can be
the climate view. started by a timer that has been set for a long
• Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202) time in advance.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
• Starting/switching off climate comfort reten-
tion* (p. 204) 2. Select the Parking climate tab.
Starting from the app*
• Symbols and messages for parking climate 3. Press Preconditioning. Start of preconditioning and information about
control* (p. 206) > Preconditioning is started/switched off the selected settings can be managed from a
and the button is illuminated/extin- device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Precondi-
• Heater* (p. 207)
guished. tioning heats the passenger compartment to a
• Parking heater* (p. 208) comfortable temperature or ventilates the pas-

}}

* Option/accessory. 201
CLIMATE CONTROL

|| senger compartment by blowing in air from out- Timer for preconditioning* Setting the timer for
side. The timer can be set so that the preconditioning preconditioning*
The passenger compartment can also be precon- is finished at a predetermined time. The timer for preconditioning can manage up to
ditioned with the car remote start function 8 time settings.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
(Engine Remote Start - ERS)5 via the Volvo On
for: Adding a time setting
Call* app.
• A time on a single date
Related information
• A time on one or more days of the week, with
• Parking climate* (p. 200) or without repetition.
• Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202)
Related information
• Starting/switching off climate comfort reten-
• Parking climate* (p. 200)
tion* (p. 204)
• Setting the timer for preconditioning*
• Symbols and messages for parking climate
(p. 202)
control* (p. 206)
• Activating/deactivating the timer for precon-
• Heater* (p. 207)
ditioning* (p. 204)
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201)
The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate
• Symbols and messages for parking climate tab in the climate view.
control* (p. 206)
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.

5 Certain markets.

202 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

3. Press Add timer. WARNING Deleting a time setting


> A pop-up window is shown.
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
NOTE
• In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
It is not possible to add a time setting if there gases are emitted if the heater starts.
already are 8 settings entered for the timer.
Delete a time setting in order to be able to
• In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
add a new one.
sawdust, etc. may ignite.

4.
• When there is a risk that the heater’s
Tap on Date to set the time for a single date. exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
Tap on Days to set the time for one or more ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
days of the week. wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation. The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting
With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
ticking/unticking the box for Repeat Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
weekly. time in advance. 2. Select the Parking climate tab.
5. With Date: Select the date for precondition-
ing by scrolling the date list with the arrows. 3. Press Edit list.
Editing a time setting
With Days: Select the days of the week for 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list.
preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for 2. Select the Parking climate tab. > The icon changes to the text Delete.
the days of the week. 5. Press Delete to confirm.
3. Press the time setting that is to be changed.
6. Set the time when the preconditioning > The time setting is removed from the list.
> A pop-up window is shown.
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows. 4. Edit the time setting in the same way as Related information
7. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time set-
described in "Adding a time setting" above. • Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202)
ting. • Activating/deactivating the timer for precon-
> The time setting is added to the list and is ditioning* (p. 204)
activated. • Heater* (p. 207)

* Option/accessory. 203
CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating/deactivating the timer for WARNING Starting/switching off climate


preconditioning* comfort retention*
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
A time setting in the timer for preconditioning ped with a heater*: Climate comfort retention maintains the climate
can be activated or deactivated based on need. in the passenger compartment after driving. The
• In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust function can use direct start from the centre dis-
gases are emitted if the heater starts. play.
• In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
• When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the cli-
mate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display. Related information Button for climate comfort retention in the Parking
• Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202) climate tab in the climate view.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
• Setting the timer for preconditioning* 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping (p. 202)
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
on the timer button to the right of the setting.
• Heater* (p. 207)
3.
> The time setting is activated/deactivated Press Keep climate comfort.
and the button illuminates/extinguishes. > Climate comfort retention is started/
switched off and the button illuminates/
extinguishes.

204 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

NOTE
It is not possible to start climate comfort
retention if there is not enough residual heat
in the engine to maintain the passenger com-
partment climate, or if the outside tempera-
ture is above approx. 20 °C.

NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.

Related information
• Parking climate* (p. 200)
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201)

* Option/accessory. 205
CLIMATE CONTROL

Symbols and messages for parking This symbol illuminates in the driver
climate control* display when the parking heater is
A number of symbols and messages regarding active.
parking climate control can be shown in the
driver display.

Symbol Message Specification


Parking climate Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.
Service required

Parking climate Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a work-
Temporarily unavailable shopA to check the function.

Parking climate Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill-
ing the vehicle's normal fuel tank.
Unavailable Fuel level too low

Parking climate Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the
parking heater*. Charging the battery.
Unavailable Charge level too low

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information • Starting/switching off climate comfort reten- • Managing messages in the driver display and
• Parking climate* (p. 200) tion* (p. 204) the centre display (p. 107)
• Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201) • Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202)
• Heater* (p. 207)

206 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

Heater* NOTE NOTE


The heater helps the engine and passenger
Make sure that there is enough charge in the Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
compartment reach the correct temperature
battery if the heater needs to be used. normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be
before and during driving.
used.
The heater has two subfunctions: Fuel and refuelling
• Parking heater - heats the engine and pas- WARNING
senger compartment, if necessary, when the
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
parking climate control's preconditioning* is off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
activated. refuel.
• Additional heater - heats the passenger Check in the driver display that the
compartment and engine, if necessary, dur- heater is switched off. This symbol
ing driving. is lit when it is working as a parking
heater.
The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted in the front
right-hand wheel housing.
Related information
NOTE • Parking heater* (p. 208)

When the heater is running, smoke may be Warning label on fuel filler flap. • Additional heater* (p. 209)
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel • Parking climate* (p. 200)
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking tank.
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
fectly normal.
supply of fuel to the heater.
If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
Battery and charging
heater is switched off automatically and the driver
The heater is powered by the car's starter battery.
display shows a message.
If the charge level of the starter battery is too low,
then the heater is switched off automatically and
the driver display shows a message.

* Option/accessory. 207
CLIMATE CONTROL

Parking heater* NOTE WARNING


The parking heater heats the passenger com-
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
partment as necessary before driving if the car's ped with a heater*:
normal fuel tank if the parking heater needs
preconditioning is activated.
to be used. • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of Make sure that there is enough charge in the gases are emitted if the heater starts.
the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front starter battery if the parking heater needs to • In locations with combustible or flamma-
right-hand wheel housing. be used. ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
This symbol illuminates in the driver sawdust, etc. may ignite.
display when the parking heater is • When there is a risk that the heater’s
active.
IMPORTANT
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
Repeated use of the parking heater combined ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
with short journeys may discharge the battery wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
NOTE and impair starting. ventilation.
When the heater is running, smoke may be If the heater is used on a regular basis, then Remember that the preconditioning can be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- the car should be driven for the same amount started by a timer that has been set for a long
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking of time that the heater is used in order to time in advance.
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard ensure that the car's battery is recharged with
from the rear section of the car. This is per- the same amount of energy as consumed by
fectly normal. the parking heater. The parking heater is used
WARNING
for a maximum of 40 minutes each time. If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of
smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds com-
The parking heater starts automatically if the
ing from the parking heater, switch off the
parking climate's preconditioning* is activated heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo
and the passenger compartment needs to be recommends that an authorised Volvo work-
heated up. shop should be contacted for repair.
It is switched off automatically when the right
temperature, the time of a set timer or the heat- Related information
er's maximum running time has been reached. • Heater* (p. 207)
The heater's maximum running time is • Additional heater* (p. 209)
40 minutes. • Parking climate* (p. 200)
• Fuses in engine compartment (p. 556)

208 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL

Additional heater* Activating/deactivating automatic start


The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger for the additional heater
compartment and engine while driving. It is possible to set whether automatic start for
the additional heater should be activated/deacti-
The additional heater is one of two subfunctions vated.
of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the
front right-hand wheel housing. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
NOTE 2. Press Climate.
When the heater is running, smoke may be 3. Select Additional Heater to activate/deac-
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- tivate automatic start of the additional heater.
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard NOTE
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal. Volvo recommends that the automatic start
for the additional heater should be switched
off for short driving distances.
The additional heater starts and is controlled
automatically when heating is required while the
car is being driven. Related information
• Heater* (p. 207)
It switches off automatically when the car is
switched off. • Parking heater* (p. 208)

NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs
to be used.

* Option/accessory. 209
LOADING AND STORAGE
LOADING AND STORAGE

Passenger compartment interior Rear seat Tunnel console


Overview of the passenger compartment's inte- The tunnel console is located between the front
rior and storage locations. seats.

Front seat

Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder* in


the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the front
seat backrest and also electrical sockets in the tunnel
console, as well as storage compartment under the seat.
Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch
Storage compartment in the door panel, glovebox and is opened/closed with a push on the handle.
sun visor. WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, Storage compartment with cup holder for
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. driver and passenger as well as 12V socket.
in the glove compartment or other compart- Storage compartment and USB port under
ments. Otherwise they may injure people in the armrest.
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision. Climate controls for the rear seat climate
functions* or storage compartment.
Related information
• Tunnel console (p. 212) NOTE
• Using the glovebox (p. 218) One of the detectors for the alarm* is located
under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid
• Sun visors (p. 219)
leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in
• Electrical sockets (p. 214) the cup holder, since this may trigger the
Storage spaces with cup holder, electrical socket and
USB port in the tunnel console. alarm.

212 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE

Related information
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 212)
• Electrical sockets (p. 214)
• Connecting a device via USB port (p. 468)
• Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 182)

* Option/accessory. 213
LOADING AND STORAGE

Electrical sockets Electrical socket in the tunnel console - 3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the
In the tunnel console there are two 12 V electri- rear seat* plug - do not pull on the cable.
cal sockets and one 230 V electrical socket*, in Pull up the cover when the socket is not
the cargo area there is one 12 V electrical being used or the socket is left unattended.
socket*.

For the sockets to supply current, the car's elec- IMPORTANT


trical system must be set in the lowest ignition Maximum socket output is 150 W.
position I. The sockets are then active as long as
the starter battery level does not become too low.
IMPORTANT
If the engine is switched off and the car is locked,
the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is • Do not use accessories with large or
switched off and the car is not locked, or is heavy connectors - they can damage the
locked with blocked lock position temporarily socket or come loose when driving.
deactivated, then the sockets continue to be Electrical socket in the tunnel console, rear seat. • Do not use accessories that can cause
active for a further ten minutes. The socket can be used for various accessories interference to the car's radio receiver or
requiring a 230 V supply, e.g. chargers and lap- electrical system for example.
NOTE top computers. • Position the accessory so that it is not at
Remember that use of the electrical socket risk of injuring the driver or passengers in
Using the socket
with the engine switched off entails a risk of the event of heavy braking or collision.
1. Pull down the socket cover and insert the
discharging the starter battery, which can limit accessory's plug. • Keep an eye on connected accessories
functionality. as they can generate heat that can burn
> The LED1 lamp on the socket indicates
Accessories that are connected to the electri- passengers or the interior.
the status.
cal sockets may be activated even when the
2. Check that the lamp is illuminated with a
car's electrical system is disconnected or if WARNING
steady green light - only then is current avail-
preconditioning is used. For this reason, dis-
able at the socket. • Only use accessories that are undam-
connect the connectors when they are not in
use in order to avoid the starter battery being aged and fault-free. The accessories
discharged. must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with
connectors designed for the socket. The

1 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

214 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE

accessories must have a CE marking, UL


marking or an equivalent safety marking. Status indication
• Never allow sockets, connectors or An LED2 lamp on the socket indicates the status
accessories to come into contact with of the socket:
water or other liquids. Do not touch or
use the socket if it appears to be dam-
aged or has come into contact with water
or other liquid.
• Do not connect junction sockets, adapt-
ers or extension cables to the socket as
these can override the socket's safety
features.
• The socket is equipped with a protective
cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or
damages the socket preventing the cover
from doing its job. Do not leave children
in the car unsupervised when the socket
is active.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.

Status indication Reason Action


Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None.

2 LED (Light Emitting Diode) }}

215
LOADING AND STORAGE

|| Status indication Reason Action


Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool
example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compart- down before reinserting the plug.
ment is too warm).
The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or continu- None. The accessory cannot be connected to the
ously) or is defective. socket.
Extinguished lamp The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the
socket.
The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest igni-
tion position I.
The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.

If the problem persists, contact a workshop - an 12 V electrical socket


authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

WARNING
Never modify or repair the 230 V electrical
socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be contac-
ted.

12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.


12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.

216
LOADING AND STORAGE

Related information
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 212)

12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.


The sockets can be used for various accessories
designed for 12 V, such as music players, cooler
boxes and mobile phones.

IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per
socket.

Using the sockets


1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console)
or fold down the cover (cargo area) and plug
in the accessory.
2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit
the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up
the cover (cargo area) when the socket is
not being used or if the socket is left unat-
tended.

* Option/accessory. 217
LOADING AND STORAGE

Using the glovebox Using the glovebox as a cooled area*


The glovebox is located on the passenger side. The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g.
drinks or food. The cooling works when the cli-
mate control system is active (i.e. when the car is
set in ignition position II or when the engine is
running).

The key's designated storage space

The printed owner's manual and maps can be


kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also a
pen holder on the inside of the lid. There is also a
card holder at the upper edge of the glovebox. Cooling activated
Locking/unlocking the glovebox* Cooling deactivated
The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is
taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The – Activate/deactivate the cooling by moving
glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the the control to the end position toward the
accompanying key. passenger compartment/glovebox.
Locking the glovebox: Related information
Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder. • Passenger compartment interior (p. 212)

Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise. • Using private locking (p. 244)

Pull out the key.

– Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.

218 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE

Sun visors Cargo area Recommendations for loading


The rear of each sun visor includes a vanity mir- The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it There are a number of things to remember when
ror with card holder. possible to transport and secure large objects. loading the car.

By folding down the backrests in the rear seat, Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
the cargo area can become quite spacious. To total of the weight of the passengers and all
facilitate loading and unloading, the rear section accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor-
of the car can be lowered with the level control responding weight.
function*. Use load retaining eyelets or bag hold-
ers to secure the load, and the extendable cargo WARNING
cover* to conceal the load if desired. The car’s driving properties change depend-
ing on the weight and positioning of the load.
The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or
spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area
floor. Loading in the cargo area
• Position the load firmly against the rear
Related information seat's backrest.
Vanity mirror with lighting plus card holder. • Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 222)
• Centre the load.
The vanity mirror lighting* is switched on auto- • Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
• Heavy objects should be placed as low as
matically when the lid is lifted. (p. 126) possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low-
The vanity mirror frame incorporates a holder for • Level control* and shock absorption (p. 423) ered backrests.
e.g. cards or tickets. • Recommendations for loading (p. 219) • Cover sharp edges with something soft to
• Tool kit (p. 522) avoid damaging the upholstery.
Related information
• Passenger compartment interior (p. 212) • Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets
with straps or web lashings.

WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).

}}

* Option/accessory. 219
LOADING AND STORAGE

|| WARNING Level control of the car's rear section* During driving, the rear section height will return
The car's rear section can be lowered/raised in to the normal level.
The protection provided by the inflatable cur- order to create a better working height for the
tain in the headlining may be compromised or
eliminated by high loads. car's cargo area or to assist when a trailer shall NOTE
be coupled/uncoupled to/from the towbar*.
• Never load cargo above the backrest. It is not possible to adjust the height of the
Level control is performed via a control at the rear section when one or more of the doors
rear on the right-hand side in the cargo area's or the bonnet is open. This does not apply to
WARNING side panel. the tailgate.
Always secure the load. During heavy braking
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to
the car's occupants. WARNING
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with Pay attention to ensure that there is no per-
something soft. son, animal or object under the car when low-
ering. This would involve danger to life and
Switch off the engine and apply the parking damage to the car or object.
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a Roof load and loading on load carriers
drive position - and the car could then move For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers3
off. that Volvo have developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
Increasing the space in the cargo area Controls for raising/lowering the car's rear section.
order to achieve the maximum possible safety
To expand the cargo area and simplify loading, during a journey.
the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note The control consists of two buttons - one button
that lowers and one button that raises the rear Carefully follow the installation instructions sup-
that objects must not prevent the function of the plied with the carriers.
WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the section of the car. For raising or lowering, each
rear seat's backrests is folded down. button must be held depressed until the rear sec- • Check periodically that the load carriers and
tion has reached the desired level. load are properly secured. Lash the load
A through-load hatch in the rear seat can be securely with retaining straps.
folded down for carrying long and narrow loads. It is not possible to raise the car's rear section
higher than its normal level. • Distribute the load evenly over the load carri-
ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

3 Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.

220 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE

• The size of the area exposed to the wind, and Load retaining eyelets Bag hooks
therefore fuel consumption, increase with the The folding load retaining eyelets are used to Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and pre-
size of the load. fasten straps in order to anchor items in the vent them from overturning and spreading their
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy cargo area. contents across the cargo area.
braking and hard cornering.
Along the sides
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving charac-
teristics are altered by roof loads.
Read about maximum permitted roof load in
the section on Weights.

Related information
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
• Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 222)
• Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 126)
WARNING There is a bag hook in the side panel on each
• Safety grille* (p. 226)
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro- side of the cargo area.
• Safety net* (p. 224) trude may cause injury under violent braking.
IMPORTANT
• Cargo cover* (p. 222) Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seatbelt or cargo retaining straps. The bag hooks may be loaded with a maxi-
• Weights (p. 581)
mum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
Related information
• Recommendations for loading (p. 219) Related information
• Bag hooks (p. 221) • Recommendations for loading (p. 219)

• Safety grille* (p. 226) • Safety grille* (p. 226)

• Safety net* (p. 224) • Safety net* (p. 224)

• Cargo cover* (p. 222) • Cargo cover* (p. 222)

* Option/accessory. 221
LOADING AND STORAGE

Through-load hatch in the rear seat Cargo cover* Then insert the other end piece in the recess
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be In the extended position, the cargo cover and in the side panel on the opposite side.
opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis. the rear panel prevent visual access to the cargo Ensure that the front panel is pointing down
area. behind the backrests before the cassette is
put in place.
Installation

Press down the end pieces on both sides -


1. In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and one by one.
fold down the hatch. > When a "click" is heard and the red mark-
2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat. Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in ing on each end piece has disappeared,
the recess in the side panel in the cargo the cargo cover is attached - check that it
If the private locking* function is used then the area. is affixed securely.
hatch must be closed.
Usage
Related information There are two extended positions for the cargo
• Using private locking (p. 244) cover - a full-cover position and a loading posi-
• Recommendations for loading (p. 219) tion, where it is partially extended to make it eas-
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 221) ier to reach further into the cargo area.

222 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE

Full-cover position Returning to full-cover position from loading posi-


tion:
1. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover
down to the end position. To facilitate, angle
up the handle slightly so that the attachment
pins pass the stops.
2. Release the handle so that the attachment
pins engage.
> The cover is locked in the full-cover posi-
tion.
Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out
to the end position. The rear panel fitted to the inside of the tailgate comple- IMPORTANT
Hook the attachment pins into the recesses ments the cargo cover. The cargo cover may obscure the view to the
at the cargo area's rear pillars. Loading mode rear when in the loading position. Make sure
> The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover From the full-cover position: the cargo cover is fully extended or fully
position. retracted when driving.

Press the cargo cover's handle section


upwards slightly.
Cargo cover in full-cover position. > The cover goes up until it stops in the
loading position.

}}

223
LOADING AND STORAGE

|| Retracting Safety net* Installation


1. From the full-cover position: The safety net prevents loads from being thrown
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis- forward in the passenger compartment in the WARNING
engage the cargo cover's attachment pins event of sudden braking. It is necessary to ensure that the upper secur-
and then release. ing points of the safety net are fitted correctly
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.
and that the puller-straps are hooked in prop-
From loading position: erly.
Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover Damaged safety nets must not be used.
in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position.
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
engage the attachment pins and then NOTE
release. With forward mounting, the safety net is most
2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins easily mounted via one of the rear doors.
outside of the side panels until it stops in the
retracted position. 1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that the
split upper rod in the net is locked in its
Removal extended position.
In retracted position:
2. Hook one retaining hook of the net into the
1. Depress the button on one of the retracted For reasons of safety, the safety net must always front or rear roof mounting with the anchor-
cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that be fastened and anchored as described below. ing strap locks turned towards you.
end.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can 3. Hook the net's other retaining hook into the
2. Angle the cover up/out carefully. be secured two different locations in the car: roof mounting on the opposite side - the
> The other end piece loosens automatically • Rear fitting - behind the rear seat. telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks
and the cover can be lifted out of the facilitate alignment.
cargo area. • Front fitting - behind the front seats.
Take care to press forward the net's retain-
Related information WARNING ing hooks for each respective roof moun-
• Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
Loads in the luggage compartment must be
ting's front end position.
• Safety net* (p. 224) anchored well, and also using a correctly fit-
ted safety net.
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)

224 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE

4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear Removing and storing
roof mountings, hook the safety net's anchor- The safety net can be easily removed and folded
ing straps into the front floor eyes in the up.
cargo area.
1. Reduce safety net tension by pressing the
button in the anchoring strap lock and feed-
ing out a little of the anchoring strap on each
side.
2. Press in the catches and detach both of the
anchoring strap's hooks.
3. Undo the upper attachments and release the
net from the roof mountings.
Front fitting.
4. Press the red button on the rod to enable
Pay attention to make sure that you do not folding and then roll up the net.
press the seat/backrest hard against the net
when the seat/backrest is moved back again Related information
Rear fitting.
- only adjust until the seat/backrest makes • Recommendations for loading (p. 219)

Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front


contact with the net. • Cargo cover* (p. 222)
roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps 5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring • Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
into the outer eyes on the rear of the seat straps.
slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are
straightened and the seats are moved for- IMPORTANT
ward slightly.
If the seat/backrest is pressed hard back-
wards against the safety net then the net
and/or its roof mountings could be damaged.

* Option/accessory. 225
LOADING AND STORAGE

Safety grille* Installation


The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the
cargo area from being thrown forward in the IMPORTANT
passenger compartment.
The safety grille must only be used in the rear
The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance position (behind the rear seat) described
with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils here.
Volvo's strength requirements.
Before first installing the safety grille, the existing
plastic roof mountings must be replaced with
steel roof mountings. Volvo recommends that 4. Insert the supplied screw and tighten using
replacing roof mountings is performed at an the supplied 6 mm Allen key. Repeat on the
authorised Volvo workshop or dealer. other side. Recommended tightening torque:
20 Nm.
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
> Check that the safety grille is properly fit-
2. Make sure that the safety grille is turned in ted.
the right direction. Lift in the safety grille
5. Restore the backrest to the upright position.
through one of the rear side doors.
For more information about the tools required
and methods for fitting/removal, see the installa-
tion instructions that were included with the initial
For safety reasons, the safety grille must always purchase.
be attached and anchored correctly.
IMPORTANT
WARNING The protective grille cannot be folded up or
Under no circumstances may anybody remain down when a cargo cover is fitted.
in the cargo area while the car is moving. This
is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident. 3. Position the safety grille's brackets on the Related information
roof mountings. • Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
The next step is facilitated if two people hold • Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
the safety grille in the right position.

226 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE

• Safety net* (p. 224)


• Cargo cover* (p. 222)

* Option/accessory. 227
LOCKS AND ALARM
LOCKS AND ALARM

Remote control key key then has a range extending in a semicircle can be ordered. A total of twelve keys can be
The remote control key locks/unlocks the doors, with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet) out programmed and used for one single car. If addi-
tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote control from the driver's door and approx. 1 metre tional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles
key needs to be inside the car for it to be (3 feet) out from the tailgate respectively. See are added - one per new remote control key. This
started. the section "Remote control key range". also applies for the key tag.
With keyless starting and keyless locking/unlock- In the event of a lost key, see the heading "Loss
ing, the remote control key can be located any- of a remote control key" below.
where in the passenger compartment or the
cargo area and maintain the functionality to start Remote control key buttons
the car.
Each of the remote control keys that are supplied
with the car can be linked to a driver profile with
unique settings for the car. When a key with a
specific profile is used, the car's settings are
adjusted to match the settings for that profile.
See the section "Driver profiles".

Button-less key (Key Tag)


Remote control key, on left, and button-less key (Key
For cars equipped with keyless locking/unlock-
Tag), on right.
ing*, a slightly smaller, lighter and button-less key
The remote control key is not physically used (Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same way as
when starting since the car is equipped with sup- the normal remote control key when it comes to The remote control key has four buttons - one on the
port for keyless starting (Passive Start) as stand- left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.
keyless starting and locking/unlocking1. It has no
ard. The key needs to be located in the front of detachable key blade and the battery cannot be Locking - Pressing the button locks the
the passenger compartment, e.g. in the driver’s replaced. A new key tag can be ordered from an doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also
pocket or in the cup holder in the tunnel console, authorised Volvo workshop. arms the alarm*. Press and hold to close all
to be able to start the car. See the section "Star- of the windows and the panorama roof*
ting the engine". Ordering additional keys simultaneously. See the section "Locking/
As an option, keyless locking/unlocking of doors The car is supplied with two remote control keys
and tailgate (Passive Entry*) is also available. The - one key tag is supplied if the car is equipped
with keyless locking/unlocking*. Additional keys

1 The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes, which makes it suitable for use in activities in and around water.

230 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

unlocking from the outside" and "Locking/ WARNING If there is still interference - use the remote con-
unlocking from the inside". trol key's key blade and then place the key in the
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the backup reader in the cup holder to disarm the
Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks power windows and sunroof are de-energised
the doors and tailgate and also disarms the car. See section "Locking/unlocking with the
by always taking the remote control key with
alarm. A longer press opens all the windows you when you leave the car. detachable key blade".
simultaneously, also called Global opening2.
See the section "Locking/unlocking from the NOTE
outside". NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in the
Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and Be aware of the risk of locking the remote cup holder, make sure that no other car keys,
disarms its alarm. On cars with power oper- control key/Key Tag in the car. metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g.
ated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto- A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers)
matically when the button is held depressed. will be deactivated when the car is locked and are in the cup holder. Several car keys close
The tailgate is also closed with a long press - the alarm is armed using another valid key. to each other in the cup holder can cause
acoustic warning signals sound. See the sec- The "Deadlock" function is also deactivated. interference with each other.
tion "Power operated tailgate".
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
Panic function – Used to attract attention car is unlocked. Loss of a remote control key
in an emergency. Press and hold the button If you lose a remote control key then a new one
for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
3 seconds to activate the direction indicators Interference Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining
and the horn. The function can be turned off Remote control key functions for keyless starting remote control keys must be taken to the work-
with the same button once it has been active and keyless locking/unlocking* can be disrupted shop. The code of the missing key must be
for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the func- by electromagnetic fields and screening. erased from the system as a theft prevention
tion switches off automatically after measure.
3 minutes. NOTE
The current number of keys registered to the car
Avoid storing the remote control key close to can be checked in the centre display's top view.
metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers - Related information
preferably no closer than 10-15 cm • Remote control key range (p. 232)
(4-6 inches). • Detachable key blade (p. 245)

2 Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather. }}

* Option/accessory. 231
LOCKS AND ALARM

• Replacing the battery in the remote control Remote control key range cular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres
key (p. 252) In order for the remote control key to work prop- (5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre
• Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239) erly it needs to be within a certain distance from (3 feet) from the tailgate.
the car.
• Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
NOTE
• Driver profiles (p. 169) For manual use
The remote control key's functions for e.g. lock- The remote control key functions may be dis-
• Starting the car (p. 404)
rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
ing/unlocking that are activated by pressing on
• Red Key - Restricted remote control key* topographical conditions, etc. The car can
(p. 233) or have a range that extends approx.
always be locked/unlocked with the key
20 metres (65 feet) from the car.
blade.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed -
move closer and try again.
If the remote control key is removed
For keyless use3 from the car
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is run-
ning, the warning message Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.

Related information
The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered • Remote control key (p. 230)
by the system's antennas. • Antenna locations for the start and lock sys-
For keyless use, a remote control key or the but- tem (p. 234)
ton-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicir-

3 Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).

232 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

Red Key - Restricted remote control car - at least one must be a normal remote con- Speed reminder4 (On/Off):
key* trol key. • Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)
A Red Key enables the car owner to set limits for The settings for Red Key are made by the user of • Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and
certain car properties. The restrictions are the normal remote control key from the centre 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph)
intended to promote safe driving of the car, e.g. display's top view; go to: Settings System
when it is loaned out.
• Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Driver Profiles Red Keys • Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6
Some of the car's driver support functions cannot Muted max. volume4 (On/Off):
be deactivated by the user of a Red Key. • Setting at first use: On
The restrictions are intended to act as measures Adaptive cruise control*:
to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it • Setting at first use: Longest intervals
feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young dri-
vers, valet parking or a workshop. The settings • See the section "Adaptive cruise control" for
more information
cannot be changed by the person using a Red
Key. Driver support functions
Possible settings The following driver support functions will always
be active for the user of a Red Key:
The following settings can be made to apply for a
Red Key: • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* - see section
For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's "Blind Spot Information"
Speed limiter (Speed Limiter)4 (On/Off):
maximum speed, set speed reminders and deter-
• Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph) • Lane assistance (LDW and LKA)* - see sec-
mine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. tion "Lane assistance"
In addition, some of the car's driver support sys- • Setting during first use is 120 km/h
tems will always be active. Other functions of the (75 mph) • Distance warning* - see section "Distance
warning"
key are the same as those of a normal remote • Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
control key. The driver display shows the symbol • City Safety - see section "City Safety"
One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a and message • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - see section
Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with restric- "Driver Alert Control"
Red key Speed limitation cannot
tions can be programmed and used for a single be exceeded. • Road Sign Information* - see section "Road
Sign Information".

4 Option, only available with Red Key. }}

* Option/accessory. 233
LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Related information Antenna locations for the start and WARNING


• Remote control key (p. 230) lock system
People with pacemaker operations should not
• Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290) The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the
system5 and therefore has a number of built-in keyless system's antennas with their pace-
• Distance Warning* (p. 287)
antennas positioned at different locations in the maker. This is to prevent interference
• BLIS* (p. 349) car. between the pacemaker and the keyless sys-
• City Safety (p. 336) tem.

• Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)


Related information
• Driver Alert Control (p. 363)
• Remote control key (p. 230)
• Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
• Remote control key range (p. 232)
• Driver profiles (p. 169)

Under the cup holder in the front section of


the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door6
In the upper front section of the right-hand
rear door6
In the cargo area6

5 The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
6 Only in cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).

234 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking/unlocking from the outside activated when all the doors and the tailgate are Settings for remote-controlled unlocking
The car is locked/unlocked from the outside closed and locked. It is possible to select different sequences for
using buttons on the remote control key or with unlocking.
NOTE
the door or tailgate handles if the car is equip- 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
ped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
view.
Entry)*. The tailgate can be operated via power control key/Key Tag in the car.
operation* and/or foot movement*. 2. Press My Car Locking Remote and
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and Interior Unlock.
Locking/unlocking with the remote the alarm is armed using another valid key. 3. Select option:
control key The "Deadlock" function is also deactivated.
• All Doors
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
car is unlocked.
• Single Door
- unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of
WARNING
the doors requires two presses on the
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with- remote control key's unlock button.
out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. The settings made for the Remote and Interior
Unlock function also affect central unlocking via
opening handles from the inside. For more infor-
Unlocking
mation about how unlocking from the inside is
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote
affected, see the section "Locking/unlocking
control key, the battery may be discharged - in
The buttons on the remote control key can be from the inside".
which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with
used to lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate the detachable key blade. See the section
simultaneously.
Keyless* locking/unlocking
"Detachable key blade" for more information. If the car is equipped with keyless locking/
Locking unlocking*, it is sufficient to have the remote con-
The driver's door must be closed in order for the NOTE trol key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag,
lock sequence to be activated. If any of the other Always try moving closer to the car and mak- making it more convenient to open the car if your
doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not ing another unlock attempt. hands are full. For information on the system's
locked and their alarms armed* until they are range, see the section "Remote control key
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are range".
}}

* Option/accessory. 235
LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Touch-sensitive surfaces NOTE Keyless locking


The outside of the door handles contains a All side doors must be closed to be able to lock
recess for locking, while the inside contains a It is important that only one touch-sensitive the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be
touch-sensitive surface for unlocking. The tail- surface is activated at a time. Gripping the open when locking the car with a side door han-
gate handle has a rubberised pressure plate that handle while touching the lock surface risks dle.
is only used for unlocking. giving double commands. This means that the
requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not – Touch the marked surface towards the rear
be executed, or will be executed with a delay. on the outside of a door handle after the
door has been closed, or press the lock7 but-
ton on the bottom edge of the tailgate before
NOTE closing it.
Be aware that the system may be activated in > The lock indicator in the windscreen starts
connection with car washing if the remote to flash to indicate the car is locked.
control key is in range. To close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the
touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door
handle until all side windows and the panoramic
roof* have been closed.
Keyless entry
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
– Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to
unlock the car.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen extin-
guishes to confirm the car is unlocked -
open the doors or tailgate as usual.

Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate used for


unlocking only.

7 See section "Power operated tailgate".

236 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

Settings for Keyless entry • Remote control key range (p. 232) Indication on locking/unlocking the
It is possible to select different sequences for • Detachable key blade (p. 245) car
Keyless entry. When the car is locked or unlocked using the
• Alarm* (p. 257)
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top remote control key, the direction indicators con-
view. firm that locking/unlocking was correctly per-
formed.
2. Tap on My Car Locking Keyless
Unlock It is possible to separately adapt the indication for
locking/unlocking, see the heading "Select how
3. Select option: the car confirms locking and unlocking" for set-
• All Doors ting options.
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
• Single Door
- unlocks selected door.

Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
being left unlocked unintentionally.

Unlocking with Volvo On Call


It is possible to remotely unlock the car with the
Volvo On Call* app.
See separate supplement for Volvo On Call.

Related information
• Remote control key (p. 230)
• Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 242)
• Power operated tailgate* (p. 247)

}}

* Option/accessory. 237
LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Exterior indication Lock and alarm indicator Indication in lock buttons


Locking Front doors
• The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door
mirrors8.
Unlocking
• The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending the
door mirrors8.
All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to
indicate the car is locked. If locking is performed
with only the driver's door closed9, the car will be The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel
locked but indication will only occur after all show the status of the alarm system.
doors, tailgate and bonnet have been closed. Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
Long flash indicates locking of the car. When the
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
car is locked, this will be indicated by short, pul-
of either front door indicates that all doors are
sating flashes.
locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extin-
guish in both doors.

8 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.


9 Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).

238 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

In all doors* Read more about indication of locking/unlocking Locking/unlocking from the inside
in section "Approach lighting" and "Adjusting the The doors and tailgate can be locked and
door mirrors". unlocked from inside using the central locking
controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on
Related information
the rear doors each lock their own rear door.
• Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
• Approach light duration (p. 144) Central locking
• Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 149)

Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.


An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
for one of the doors indicates that the door in
question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its
lamp will extinguish while the others will continue
to illuminate.
Locking/unlocking button with indicator lamp in the
front door.
Select how the car confirms locking
and unlocking – Press the button to lock and the but-
Different options for indicating locking/unlocking ton to unlock.
can be set via the centre display.
Unlocking
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
– Press the button to unlock all side doors
view.
and the tailgate.
2. Press My Car Locking.
3. Select setting for Audible Locking
Feedback and Visible Locking Feedback
respectively.

}}

* Option/accessory. 239
LOCKS AND ALARM

|| A long press on the button opens all the side Locking Settings for automatic locking
windows simultaneously - also called global – Press the button - both front doors must The doors and tailgate are locked automatically
opening10. be closed. when the car starts to move. To change this set-
ting:
Alternative unlocking method > All doors and the tailgate are locked.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
A long press on the button closes all side view.
windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
2. Press My Car Locking.
Lock button* rear doors
3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving to
deactivate/activate this function.

Related information
• Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
• Indication on locking/unlocking the car
(p. 237)
• Child safety locks (p. 256)
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the front
door.
– Pull the opening handle on one of the front
doors and release.
> If the All Doors option is selected for the Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
Remote and Interior Unlock function The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec-
for the remote control key, all doors will be tive rear door.
unlocked. If the Single Door option is
To unlock the rear door:
selected, only this front door will be
unlocked and opened. – Pull the door handle - the rear door unlocks
and opens.
The options are selected in the settings view. For
more information, see the section "Locking/
unlocking from the outside".

10 Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather.

240 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

Deadlocks* Temporarily deactivating the deadlock NOTE


Deadlock means that all opening handles are function
disengaged mechanically, which prevents door If someone is going to stay in the car but the • Remember that the alarm is activated
doors must be locked from the outside, then the when the car is locked.
opening from the inside when the car is locked
from the outside. deadlock function can be temporarily deactivated • If any of the doors are opened from the
with the Reduced guard function. The proce- inside then the alarm is triggered.
Deadlocks are activated with the remote control dure is the same as with the temporary disen-
key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*. gagement of the alarm's movement and tilt Related information
Deadlocks are activated with a delay of about detectors*.
10 seconds after the doors have locked. • Remote control key (p. 230)
Press the Reduced guard • Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
button in the centre display's
NOTE function view in order to deacti-
• Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239)
If a door is opened within the delay time then vate the deadlock function tem- • Locking/unlocking with the detachable key
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is porarily. blade (p. 246)
deactivated. • Alarm* (p. 257)
After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the cen-
The car can only be unlocked with the remote tre display and deadlocks are temporarily deacti-
control key, keyless unlocking or the Volvo On vated in the subsequent locking of the car. Note
Call* app when deadlocks are activated. that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are
The front left door can also be unlocked with the switched off at the same time.
detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are
the detachable key blade, the alarm* will be trig- deactivated immediately, but when deadlocks are
gered. See the section "Alarm" for switching off temporarily deactivated, they will be active for a
the alarm. maximum of 10 minutes after locking.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the
WARNING
deadlock function must be deactivated again.
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with-
out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to The system is reset the next time the engine is
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. started.

* Option/accessory. 241
LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking/unlocking the tailgate 1. Press the remote control key's button. Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
The tailgate can be locked/unlocked and > The lock and alarm indicator on the instru-
opened in different ways depending on the ment panel extinguishes in order to show
equipment level of the car. that the alarm is not armed for the whole
of the car.
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote
control key The alarm's level and movement sensors
and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are disconnected.
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed while the doors remain locked and
their alarm functions armed.
To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pres-
Rubber plate with pressure-sensitive surface.
sure plate beneath the tailgate handle
and open the tailgate. The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
You simply need to have the remote control key
If the tailgate is not opened within
in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag.
2 minutes then it is relocked and the
alarm is re-armed. 1. To open the tailgate - lightly press on the
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed and the tail- rubberised pressure plate beneath the tail-
2. With the power operated tailgate option* -
gate unlocked by using the remote control key's gate handle.
button. Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the > The lock is released.
remote control key's button
> The tailgate is unlocked and opened, NOTE
while the doors remain locked and their
If the remote key is not detected sufficiently
alarm functions armed.
close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will
not work. See the section "Remote key
range" for more information.

242 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

2. Lift by the outside handle in order to fully Unlocking the tailgate from the inside Related information
open the tailgate. of the car • Remote control key (p. 230)
1. • Remote control key range (p. 232)
IMPORTANT
• Power operated tailgate* (p. 247)
• Minimal force is required to release the
• Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move-
rear hatch lock - just gently press the rub-
ment* (p. 250)
berised panel.
• Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the rub-
ber panel.

WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic Brief press on the button on the instru-
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car ment panel.
through the cargo area. > The tailgate can be unlocked and opened
from the outside by grasping the rubber-
ised pressure plate.
2. With the power operated tailgate option* -
Long press on the button on the instru-
ment panel.
> The tailgate opens.

Locking with the remote control key


– Press the remote control key's button.
> The lock and alarm indicator on the instru-
ment panel starts to flash - the car is
locked and the alarm* is armed.

* Option/accessory. 243
LOCKS AND ALARM

Using private locking 2. Enter the desired security code. NOTE


The tailgate can be locked with the private lock- > The security code is saved. The private
If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if
ing function when the car is taken in for service, locking function is now ready to be acti-
the wrong PIN code has been entered more
left at a hotel or similar. vated.
than three times, the security code can be
If the system has been reset then the above pro- used to deactivate the private locking.
NOTE cedure needs to be repeated.
The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a
minimum for the private locking function to be Activate private locking NOTE
activated. 1. Press the button for private locking in the
If private locking is activated and the car is
function view.
unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On
Function button for private > A pop-up window is shown. Call* app, private locking will be deactivated
locking. Depending on the cur- 2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock automatically.
rent status of the lock, Private the tailgate after locking and tap on
locking unlocked or Private Confirm. Related information
locking locked is shown. > The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of • Using the glovebox (p. 218)
locking takes place by means of a green
• Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 242)
indicator being shown by the button in the
Enter the security code before using for function view.
the first time
A security code needs to be selected during the Deactivate private locking
first time the function is used. It can then be used 1. Press the button for private locking in the
to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN function view.
code has been lost or forgotten. The security > A pop-up window is shown.
code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN
codes set for the private locking function. 2. Enter the code that was used for locking and
tap on Confirm.
Save the security code in a safe place. > The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation of
To create a security code: unlocking takes place by means of the
green indicator by the button in the func-
1. Press the button for private locking in the
tion view extinguishing.
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.

244 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

Detachable key blade Detaching the key blade


The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which a number of func-
tions can be activated and some operations car-
ried out.

The key blade's unique code is provided by


authorised Volvo workshops, which are recom-
mended when ordering new key blades.

The key blade's application areas Return the key blade to its intended position
Using the remote control key's detachable key Hold the remote control key with the in the remote control key after use.
blade: front visible and the Volvo logo facing the Refit the shell by pressing it downward
• the left-hand11 front door can be opened right way - slide the button at bottom edge until a clicking sound is heard.
manually if central locking cannot be acti- by the key ring to the right. Guide the front
vated with the remote control key. side's shell a few millimetres upwards. Then slide the shell back sedan.
• all doors are emergency locked - see the > A further click will indicate that the shell is
The shell will then come free and can be
section "Locking/unlocking with detachable securely attached.
lifted off the key.
key blade".
Related information
• the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks • Locking/unlocking with the detachable key
can be activated/deactivated - see the sec- blade (p. 246)
tion "Child safety locks".
• Child safety locks (p. 256)
The button-less key12 (Key Tag) does not have a
detachable key blade. If necessary, use the
• Remote control key (p. 230)
detachable key blade from the normal remote
control key.

Detach the key blade by angling it up.

11 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive.


12 Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).

* Option/accessory. 245
LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking/unlocking with the 5. Pull out the handle. 2. Then turn the start knob clockwise and
detachable key blade > The door opens. release it.
Amongst other things, the detachable key blade > The control automatically returns to its
Locking will be performed in the same way, but
can be used to unlock the car from the outside - starting position - the alarm signal stops
with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of
e.g. if the remote control key's battery has and the alarm switches off.
clockwise in step (3).
become discharged.
Switching off the alarm* Locking
Unlocking It is also possible to lock the car with the remote
control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the
NOTE
event of a loss of power or if the key's battery
When the door is unlocked using the key has become discharged.
blade and is then opened, the alarm is trig-
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
gered.
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead
have a lock switch on the end of each door which
must be depressed using the key blade - they are
then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent
Pull out the front door handle on the left- them being opened from outside.
hand side13 to its end position so that the The doors can still be opened from the inside.
lock cylinder become visible.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.

Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
blade is pointing straight back.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting
1. Place the remote control key in the backup
position. Remove the key from the lock cylin-
reader in the bottom of the cup holder in the
der and release the handle so that the rear
tunnel console.
section of the handle is resting against the
car again.

13 This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.

246 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

NOTE Power operated tailgate*


The car's tailgate can be opened/closed electri-
• A door's lock reset only locks that partic-
cally.
ular door - not all doors simultaneously.
• A manually locked rear door with acti- Opening/closing via a foot movement is also
vated manual or electric child safety locks available as an extended option - see the section
cannot be opened from either the outside "Opening/closing the power operated tailgate
or the inside. A rear door that is locked in with foot movement" for more information.
this way can only be unlocked with the
remote control key or central locking but- Opening
ton. The tailgate can be opened with its handle, with
foot movement*, a button on the instrument
panel or the remote control key.
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the Related information
child safety locks. Choose one of the following options to open the
• Detachable key blade (p. 245)
– Remove the detachable key blade from the tailgate:
remote control key. Insert the key blade in • Light press on the tailgate handle.
the hole for lock reset and press the key in
until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm. • Long press on the instrument panel's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
The door can be opened from both the out- starts to open.
side and the inside.
• Long press on the remote control key's
The door is blocked against opening from
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
the outside. To return to position A, the inner
starts to open.
door handle must be opened.
The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock • Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
button on the remote control key or with the cen-
tral locking button on the driver's door.

}}

* Option/accessory. 247
LOCKS AND ALARM

|| – Press the button14 on the underside of Closing and locking


the tailgate to close. – Press the button14 on the underside of
the tailgate to close it and simultaneously
lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be
closed for locking).
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail-
gate and doors are locked, and the alarm*
is armed.

NOTE
If the remote key is not detected sufficiently
Opening/closing button on the instrument panel. close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will
not work. See the section "Remote key
Closing range" for more information.
The tailgate can be closed via the instrument Button for closing and locking on the underside of the
panel's button, with foot movement*, with the tailgate.
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail- NOTE
remote control key or the buttons14 along the
gate remains unlocked.
bottom edge of the tailgate. When using key-free* blocking/closing, three
Choose one of the following options to close the signals will sound if the key is not detected
NOTE
tailgate: sufficiently close to the tailgate. See the sec-
The button is active 24 hours after the hatch tions "Remote key range" and "Locks and
– Long press on the instrument panel's has been left open. Thereafter, it must be remote keys" for more information.
button or the remote control key's but- closed manually.
ton.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
IMPORTANT
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked. During manual tailgate operation, open or
close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
close it if there is resistance. It may be dam-
aged and stop working correctly.

14 A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.

248 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

Cancel opening/closing 2. Press the button on the underside of and the tailgate returns to the programmed
– Cancel opening/closing in one of the follow- the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. max. position.
ing ways: > Two short acoustic signals sound to indi-
• Press the button on the instrument panel. cate that the set position has been saved. WARNING
• Press the remote control key's button. To reset max. opening: Observe the risk of trapping when opening/
closing. Before starting opening/closing,
• Press the close button14 along the bottom – Manually move the tailgate to its highest check that there is nobody near to the tailgate
edge of the tailgate. possible position - press the button on as trapping may have serious consequences.
• Press the rubberised pressure plate the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. Always operate the tailgate with caution.
beneath the outside handle. > Two acoustic signals sound to indicate
• Using the foot movement* (see section that the set position has been cleared. Pre-tensioned springs
"Opening/closing power operated tailgate The tailgate will then assume its max.
with foot movement" for more informa- position when opened.
tion).
> Tailgate movement will be interrupted and NOTE
the tailgate will stop and can then be • If the system has been operating continu-
manoeuvred manually. ously for a long time, it is switched off to
avoid overload. It can be used again after
Programmable max. opening
about 2 minutes.
The maximum opening position of the tailgate
can be adjusted, e.g. to suit a low ceiling height in
a garage. Pinch protection
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
To adjust max. opening:
the tailgate from opening/closing then the pinch The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tail-
1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open posi- protection is activated. gate.
tion.
• During opening - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal
sounds.
• During closing - movement is interrupted, the
tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds

14 A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. }}

* Option/accessory. 249
LOCKS AND ALARM

|| WARNING Opening/closing the tailgate with Operation


foot movement*
Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the
power operated tailgate. They are pre-ten- To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when
sioned with high pressure and can cause your hands are occupied, it can be opened/
injury if opened. closed by means of a forward kicking motion
under the rear bumper.
Related information
• Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 242)
• Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move-
ment* (p. 250)
• Remote control key range (p. 232)

Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.

The sensor is positioned to the left of centre in the


bumper.
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range15 behind the car in order for open-
ing/closing to be possible. This also applies to an
already unlocked car in order to avoid accidental
opening e.g. in a car wash.

15 See the section "Remote control key range" for more information.

250 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

Opening/closing If several kicking motions take place without an • Remote control key range (p. 232)
approved remote control key being located
NOTE behind the car, opening will not be possible until
after a certain delay.
The foot-operated tailgate function is availa-
ble in two versions: Do not leave your foot positioned under the car
during the kicking motion. This could cause acti-
• Opening and closing with foot movement vation to fail.
• Only unlocking with foot movement (lift Cancel opening/closing
up the tailgate manually to open it) – Make one slow forward kicking motion when
Note that the function for opening and clos- opening/closing is in progress in order to
ing with foot movement requires the "Power stop the movement of the tailgate.
operated tailgate"* option.
The remote control key does not have to be in
the vicinity of the car to cancel opening/closing.
– Make one slow, forward kicking motion
under the left part of the rear bumper. Then NOTE
take a step back. The bumper must not be
There is a risk of reduced function, or no
touched.
function, if the rear bumper is loaded with
> A short acoustic signal sounds when large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For
opening/closing is activated - the tailgate this reason, make sure you keep it clean.
is opened/closed.
If the tailgate is on open position then it is
always closed on activation via foot move- NOTE
ment. Pay attention to the possibility that the sys-
tem may be activated in a car wash or similar
The tailgate can also be closed via the instrument
if the remote key is within range.
panel's button, the remote control key or the but-
ton(s)16 under the tailgate. For more information,
see the section "Power operated tailgate". Related information
• Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 242)
• Power operated tailgate* (p. 247)

16 Only applies to a car equipped with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry)*.

* Option/accessory. 251
LOCKS AND ALARM

Replacing the battery in the remote The battery in the button-less key17 (Key Tag) Opening and changing
control key cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered
The battery in the remote control key needs to from an authorised Volvo workshop.
be replaced when it has become discharged.
IMPORTANT
NOTE A discharged Key Tag must be handed over
All batteries have a limited service life and to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key
must eventually be replaced (does not apply must be deleted from the car since it is still
to Key Tag). The service life of the battery var- possible to use it to start the car via back-up
ies depending on how often the vehicle/key start.
is used. Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
The battery for the remote control key should be right way - slide the button at bottom edge
replaced if: by the key ring to the right. Slide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
the information symbol illuminates and
the message Car key battery low The shell will then come free and can be
See Owner's manual is shown in the lifted off the key.
driver display
and/or
• the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
(65 feet) of the car.

NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and mak-
ing another unlock attempt.

17 This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*).

252 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

Turn the key, move the button to the side Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the bat- The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then
and slide the back shell a few millimetres tery cover anticlockwise until the markings carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.
upwards. meet at the OPEN text.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by press- IMPORTANT
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key. ing e.g. a fingernail into the recess. Avoid touching new batteries and their con-
Then prize the battery cover upwards. tact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.

}}

253
LOCKS AND ALARM

|| NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-
section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.

Install a new battery with the (+) side up. Reposition the rear side's shell and press
Avoid touching the remote control key's bat- it down until a clicking sound can be heard.
tery contacts with your fingers.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
Place the battery in the holder with the
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
edge down. Then slide the battery forwards
properly positioned and securely attached.
so that it fastens under the two plastic
catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens
under the upper black plastic catch. Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise
until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation CR2032,
3 V.

254
LOCKS AND ALARM

Immobiliser The following error message in the driver display


The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection is related to the remote-controlled immobiliser
system that prevents an unauthorised person with tracking system:
from starting the car.
Symbol Message Specification
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key. Remotely The remote-con-
immobilised trolled immobiliser
The following error message in the driver display
with tracking sys-
is related to the electronic immobiliser: Car not pos-
tem is activated.
sible to start
Turn the remote control key over and refit The car cannot be
the front side's shell by pressing it down until Symbol Message Specification started. Contact
a clicking sound can be heard. Car key not Error reading the Volvo On Call
found remote control key Service Centre.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
during starting -
> A further click will indicate that the shell is See Related information
place the key in the
securely attached. Owner's • Remote control key (p. 230)
cup holder near the
manual
key symbol and try • Remote control key range (p. 232)
IMPORTANT again.
Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis-
posed of in a manner which is kind to the Remote-controlled immobiliser with
environment. tracking system18
The car is fitted with a system which makes it
possible to track and locate the car and to
Related information
remotely activate the immobiliser, which prevents
• Remote control key (p. 230)
starting the engine. Contact your nearest Volvo
dealer for more information and assistance with
activating the system.

18 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.

* Option/accessory. 255
LOCKS AND ALARM

Child safety locks 2. Press the button in the driver's door control Symbol Message Specification
The child safety locks prevent children from panel.
being able to open a rear door from the inside. > The driver display shows the message Rear child Child safety
There is an electric* and a manual lock. Rear child lock Activated and the but- lock Acti- locks are acti-
ton's lamp illuminates - the locks are vated vated.
Electric activation/deactivation* active.
The electric child safety locks can be activated/ Rear child Child safety
deactivated in all ignition positions higher than 0. When the electric child safety lock is active then lock Deacti- locks are deacti-
Activation/deactivation can be performed up to the rear: vated vated.
2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided • windows can only be opened with the driver's
that no door is opened. See the section "Ignition door control panel Manual activation/deactivation
position" for more information.
• doors cannot be opened from inside.
To deactivate the locks:
– Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
The current setting is stored when the engine is
switched off - if the child safety locks are acti-
vated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man-
Button for electric activation/deactivation. started. ual door locks.

1. Start the engine or choose an ignition posi- – Use the remote control key's detachable key
tion higher than 0. blade to turn the knob. For more information,
see the section "Detachable key blade".

256 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

The door is blocked against opening from Alarm* NOTE


the inside. The alarm alerts e.g. in the event of a break-in in
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
The door can be opened from both the out- the car.
the event of movement in the passenger
side and the inside.
When armed, the alarm is triggered if: compartment - air currents are also regis-
tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if
NOTE • a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened19 the car is left with a window or the panoramic
• A door's knob control only blocks that • a movement is detected in the passenger roof* open or if the passenger compartment
particular door - not both rear doors compartment (if fitted with a movement heater is used.
simultaneously. detector*) To avoid this: Close the window/panoramic
• Cars with an electric child safety lock do • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with roof when leaving the car. If the car's inte-
not have a manual child lock. a tilt detector*) grated parking heater (or a portable electric
• the starter battery's cable is disconnected heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from
the air vents so that they are not pointing
Related information • the siren is disconnected.
upwards into the passenger compartment.
• Detachable key blade (p. 245) If there is a fault in the alarm system, Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used
• Ignition positions (p. 403) the driver display shows the symbol - see the section further down in this article.
and the message Alarm system
failure Service required. In which Arming the alarm
case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo Lock and arm the car alarm as follows:
workshop is recommended.
• press the remote control key's lock button
NOTE • touch in the marked area on the outside of
the door handle20
Do not attempt to repair or alter components
in the alarm system yourself. Any such • push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure
attempts may affect the terms of the insur- plate20.
ance. If the car is equipped with a power-operated tail-
gate, the button on the underside of the tailgate
can also be used to lock the car and arm the car
alarm.

19 Applies to certain markets.


20 Only applies to a car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) }}

* Option/accessory. 257
LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Deactivate the alarm Lock and alarm indicator Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in
Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows: order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during trans-
• press the remote control key's unlock button
port on a car train or car ferry. The procedure is
• grip one of the door handles20 the same as with the temporary disengagement
• push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure of the "Deadlock" function.
plate20. Press the Reduced guard
button in the centre display's
Switching off a triggered alarm function view in order to switch
– Press the remote control key's unlock button off the movement and tilt
or set the car in ignition position I by turning detectors temporarily.
the start knob clockwise and then releasing.

NOTE A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the Related information
• Remember that the alarm is activated alarm system's status: • Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
when the car is locked. (p. 259)
• LED not lit – alarm not armed.
• If any of the doors are opened from the • Disarming the alarm* without working remote
inside then the alarm is triggered. • The LED flashes once every other second – control key (p. 259)
alarm is armed.
• Deadlocks* (p. 241)
• After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED
Alarm signals flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds
When the alarm has been triggered, the following or until ignition position I has been selected
happens: by turning the start knob clockwise and
• A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the releasing it - the alarm has been triggered.
alarm is switched off.
Reduced alarm level
• The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt
or until the alarm is switched off. detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified,
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times21.

20 Only applies to a car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*)


21 Applies to certain markets.

258 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

Automatic arming/rearming of the Disarming the alarm* without Detection of unknown car
alarm* working remote control key component*
Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if The "Foreign Component Detection" function
being left with the alarm disarmed unintention- the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the can detect whether an unknown car component
ally. remote control key's battery is dead. has been connected to the car.

If the car is unlocked with the remote control key 1. Open the driver's door with the detachable Each LED headlamp* is designed for the car. If
(which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors key blade. an unknown headlamp is connected, the driver
or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then > The alarm is triggered. display shows a message Unknown car part.
the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is Service required, unknown car part found.
relocked at the same time. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
In certain markets, the alarm is re-armed auto- Volvo workshop.
matically after a certain delay after the driver's Related information
door has been opened and closed without being
locked.
• Book service and repair (p. 528)

Related information
• Alarm* (p. 257)
• Disarming the alarm* without working remote The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
control key (p. 259)
2. Place the remote control key in the backup
reader in the tunnel console's cup holder.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.
> The alarm is deactivated.

Related information
• Alarm* (p. 257)
• Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
(p. 259)
• Detachable key blade (p. 245)
• Starting the car (p. 404)

* Option/accessory. 259
LOCKS AND ALARM

Type approval for the remote Lock system keyless start (Passive
control key system Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
Type approval for the remote control key system (Passive Entry*)
can be read in the table.

CEM marking for the remote control key system. For


supplementary type approval number, see the table
below.

Country/Area Type approval


Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250
Serbia P1614120100
Argentina CNC ID: C-14771

260 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM

Country/Area Type approval


Brazil MT-3245/2015

Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015


Malaysia RAAT/37A/0315/S(15-0663)
Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396
Russia

The United Arab Emirates ER37847/15


DA0062437/11

}}

261
LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Country/Area Type approval


Namibia TA-2016-02

South Africa TA-2014-1868

For more information about type approval for the


remote control key system, see
support.volvocars.com.

Remote control key


Country/Area Type approval
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/104
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015

262
LOCKS AND ALARM

Country/Area Type approval


Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8423
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia
perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Oman

Serbia

}}

263
LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Country/Area Type approval


The United Arab Emirates

Namibia TA-2015-102

South Africa TA-2015-432

264
LOCKS AND ALARM

Key Tag
Country/Area Type approval
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/107
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia
perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Oman

}}

265
LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Country/Area Type approval


Serbia

The United Arab Emirates

266
LOCKS AND ALARM

Country/Area Type approval


Namibia TA-2015-103

South Africa TA-2015-414

Related information
• Remote control key (p. 230)

267
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT

Speed-dependent steering force Settings My Car Drive Modes Stability system RSC1
Speed related power steering causes the steer- Steering force The stability system RSC minimises the risk of
ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the Steering force selection cannot be accessed dur- overturning, for example during a sudden evasive
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv- ing a turn if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph). manoeuvre or if the car skids.
ity.
Related information The RSC system registers if and how much the
On motorways the steering feels firmer. When car's lateral inclination changes. This information
parking and at low speed steering is light and • Drive modes* (p. 418)
is used to calculate the risk of the car overturn-
requires only a slight effort. ing. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability con-
trol system engages, the engine torque is
NOTE reduced and one or more wheels are braked until
the car has regained its stability.
In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be tempo-
rarily cooled - during this time the power WARNING
steering operates with reduced power and Under normal driving conditions, the RSC sys-
turning the steering wheel may then be per- tem improves the car's road safety, but this
ceived to be slightly heavier. must not be taken as a reason to increase
speed. Always follow the normal precautions
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer- for safe driving.
ing assistance, the driver display shows a
message.
Related information
• Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
Change the steering force level* • Safety (p. 56)
To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive
modes" section and see the description at the
alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading
"Selectable drive modes".
For the car models without a drive mode control
with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of
steering force is instead made via the centre dis-
play's top view and the following search path:

270 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT

Electronic Stability Control ESC2 The ESC system consists of the following func- braking when driving in low gear on slippery road
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) helps the tions: surfaces.
driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's • Active Yaw Control Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
traction.
• Spin Control amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to